PANASONIC TH-50EQ2W (01) PDF MANUAL

PANASONIC TH-50EQ2W (01) PDF SUMMARY:

What is the actual resolution of the display?

3840 × 2160p

What are the model numbers for the UHD LCD Display?

• TH-86EQ2W 86-inch model
• TH-75EQ2W 75-inch model
• TH-65EQ2W 65-inch model
• TH-55EQ2W 55-inch model
• TH-50EQ2W 50-inch model
• TH-43EQ2W 43-inch model

Are the illustrations and screens in these operating instructions the same as the actual ones?

No, the illustrations and screens in the operating instructions are images for illustration purposes, and may be different from the actual ones.

Which model are the descriptive illustrations in these operating instructions created from?

The 55-inch model

What should I do to prevent damage that may result in fire or shock hazard?

Do not expose this appliance to dripping or splashing. Do not place containers with water (flower vase, cups, cosmetics, etc.) above the set, including on shelves above, etc. No naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, should be placed on / above the set.

How can I prevent electric shock?

Do not remove the cover. No user serviceable parts are inside. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.

What should I do if I am unable to insert the plug into the outlet?

If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician. Do not defeat the purpose of the earthing plug.

What should I do to prevent electric shock?

Ensure the earthing pin on the AC cord power plug is securely connected.

Where should I avoid placing this appliance?

This appliance is intended for use in environments that are relatively free of electromagnetic fields. Using this appliance near sources of strong electromagnetic fields or where electrical noise may overlap with the input signals could cause the picture and sound to wobble or cause interference such as noise to appear. Using this appliance near sources of strong electromagnetic fields or where electrical noise may overlap with the input signals could cause the sensor function to not work correctly. To avoid the possibility of harm to this appliance, keep it away from sources of strong electromagnetic fields.

Is this equipment compliant with Class A of CISPR32?

Yes, and in a residential environment, this equipment may cause radio interference.

Where should I never place a display?

Never place a display in an unstable location. A display may fall, causing serious personal injury or death.

How can I prevent many injuries from happening, particularly to children?

Take simple precautions such as:

• Using cabinets or stands recommended by the manufacturer of the display
• Only using furniture that can safely support the display
• Ensuring the display is not overhanging the edge of the supporting furniture
• Not placing the display on tall furniture (for example, cupboards or bookcases) without anchoring both the furniture and the display to a suitable support
• Not placing the display on cloth or other materials that may be located between the display and supporting furniture
• Educating children about the dangers of climbing on furniture to reach the display or its controls

What should I consider if the existing display is going to be retained and relocated?

The same considerations as above should be applied.

What kind of plug is this display supplied with?

This display is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug.

What is the rating of the fuse fitted in the plug?

10 amp

What should I do if the fuse needs to be replaced?

Ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 10 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.

What should I do if the plug contains a removable fuse cover?

You must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced.

What should I do if I lose the fuse cover?

The plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained.

Where can I purchase a replacement fuse cover?

From your local Panasonic dealer.

Can I cut off the mains plug?

No. Do not cut off the mains plug.

What type of mains lead should I use?

Do not use any other type of mains lead except the one supplied with this display. The supplied mains lead and moulded plug are designed to be used with this display to avoid interference and for your safety.

What should I do if the socket outlet in my home is not suitable?

Get it changed by a qualified electrician.

Where should I purchase a replacement plug or mains lead if they become damaged?

Purchase a replacement from an authorized dealer.

Must this display be earthed?

Yes.

How can I replace the fuse?

Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.

What optional accessories can I use with this LCD Display?

This LCD Display is for use only with the following optional accessories. Use with any other type of optional accessories may cause instability which could result in the possibility of injury. Securely install the wall hanging bracket of the optional accessories. Ask an authorized dealer for installation. The following number of people are required for installation.

Model	Number of people required for installation
86-inch model 75-inch model	4 or more
65-inch model 55-inch model 50-inch model 43-inch model	2 or more

Pedestal

Model	Part Number
75-inch model 65-inch model	TY-ST75PE9
55-inch model	TY-ST55PE9
50-inch model 43-inch model	TY-ST43PE9

Wall hanging bracket*1

Model	Part Number
86-inch model 75-inch model 65-inch model	TY-WK98PV1

Other accessories

• 3G-SDI Terminal Board TY-SB01SS
• 12G-SDI Terminal Board TY-SB01QS
• DIGITAL LINK Switcher*2 ET-YFB200G
• Early Warning Software (Basic license/3-year license): ET-SWA100 series*3

*1: This product can be purchased in the U.S. and Japan.

*2: The Digital Interface Box (model number: ET-YFB100G) can also be used.

*3: Suffix of the part number may differ depending on the license type.

Are the part numbers of the optional accessories subject to change?

Yes, the part numbers of the optional accessories are subject to change without notice.

What should I do when installing the wall hanging bracket?

Read the operating instructions supplied with it carefully and install properly. Also, always use the overturn prevention accessories.

Who is responsible for any product damage, etc. caused by failures in the installation environment for the pedestal or wall hanging bracket, even during the warranty period?

No one is responsible for any product damage, etc. caused by failures in the installation environment for the pedestal or wall hanging bracket, even during the warranty period.

Where should I keep small parts?

Keep small parts away from young children. Discard unneeded small parts and other objects, including packaging materials and plastic bags/sheets to prevent them from being played with by young children, creating the potential risk of suffocation.

Where should I not place the display?

Do not place the Display on sloped or unstable surfaces, and ensure that the Display does not hang over the edge of the base. This is because the Display may fall off or tip over.

Where should I install this unit?

Install this unit at a location with minimal vibration and which can support the weight of the unit. Dropping or falling of the unit may cause injury or malfunction.

What is the minimum weight/load for the UL Listed Wall Mount Bracket that is to be used with this display?

50.7 kg (111.8 lbs).

What should I do when installing the display vertically?

Be sure that the power indicator comes to the upper side. If installed in different directions, heat is generated and it may cause fire or damage to the Display.

What should I do when using this unit?

Be sure to take safety measures to prevent falling or dropping of the unit. If an earthquake occurs or a child climbs the unit, the unit may fall or drop, resulting in an injury.

Should I position the unit with its liquid crystal panel facing upright?

No. Do not position the unit with its liquid crystal panel facing upright. There are conditions of mounting method, environmental temperature, connections and settings. If installed in different conditions, heat is generated and it may cause fire or damage to the Display.

Who should perform the installation of the display?

The installation should be performed by an installation professional. Installing the Display incorrectly may lead to an accident that results in death or serious injury. Use the optional Pedestal.

What kind of pedestal should I use when installing the pedestal?

The pedestal that conforms to VESA standards must be used.

What kind of wall hanging bracket should I use when installing on a wall?

The specified wall hanging bracket (optional accessory) or a wall hanging bracket that conforms to VESA standards must be used.

What are the VESA standards for each model?

Model	VESA standards
86-inch model 75-inch model	600 × 400
65-inch model 55-inch model 50-inch model	400 × 400
43-inch model	200 × 200

What should I do when installing the display on the wall?

Check that the installation location has enough strength to support the weight of the display and the wall hanging bracket for anti-drop. If you terminate the use of the product, ask a professional to remove it promptly. When mounting the Display on the wall, prevent the mounting screws and power cable from contacting metal objects inside the wall. An electric shock may occur if they contact metal objects inside the wall.

What voltage is this display designed to operate on?

110 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

What should I do if problems or malfunctions occur?

Stop using the display immediately. If problems occur, unplug the power supply plug. Examples of problems that may occur are:

• Smoke or an abnormal odor comes out from the unit
• No picture appears or no sound is heard, occasionally
• Liquid such as water or foreign objects got inside the unit
• The unit has deformed or broken parts

What may happen if you continue to use the unit if any of the problems listed above occur?

It could result in fire or electric shock. If this happens, unplug the power supply plug from the wall outlet, and then contact the dealer for repairs.

What should I do if I need to cut off the power supply to this display completely?

Unplug the power supply plug from the wall outlet.

Is it safe to repair the unit myself?

No, repairing the unit yourself is dangerous, and shall never be done.

Where should the wall outlet be located?

Use the wall outlet which you can reach easily to enable to unplug the power supply plug immediately.

What may happen if you touch the unit directly by hand when it is damaged?

Electric shock could occur.

Should I stick any foreign objects into the display?

No. Do not stick any foreign objects into the Display. Do not insert any metal or flammable objects into the ventilations holes or drop them onto the Display, as doing so can cause fire or electric shock.

Can I remove or modify the cover (cabinet)?

No. Do not remove the cover (cabinet) or modify it. High voltages which can cause fire or electric shocks are present inside the Display. For any inspection, adjustment and repair work, please contact your local Panasonic dealer.

Where should the mains plug be connected?

The mains plug shall be connected to a mains socket outlet with a protective earthing connection.

Can I use a power supply cord other than that provided with this unit?

No. Do not use any power supply cord other than that provided with this unit. Doing so may cause short-circuit, generate heat, etc., which could cause electric shock or fire.

Can I use the supplied power supply cord with any other devices?

No. Do not use the supplied power supply cord with any other devices. Doing so may cause short-circuit, generate heat, etc., which could cause electric shock or fire.

How often should I check the power supply plug?

Periodically check the power supply plug to make sure it is not deformed or has not become dusty. If there is a build-up of dust on the plug, the resultant humidity may cause short-circuit, which could cause electric shock or fire. Unplug the power supply plug from the wall outlet and wipe it with a dry cloth.

Can I handle the power supply plug with wet hands?

No. Do not handle the power supply plug with wet hands. Doing so may cause electric shocks.

How should I insert the power supply plug (socket outlet side) and the power supply connector (main unit side)?

Securely insert the power supply plug (socket outlet side) and the power supply connector (main unit side) as far as it will go. If the plug is not fully inserted, heat may be generated which could cause fire.

What should I do if the plug is damaged or the wall socket is loose?

Do not use them. Also, for the 86-inch model, make sure that the connector is locked on both the left and right sides.

Can I damage the power supply cord or the power supply plug?

No. Do not do anything that may damage the power supply cord or the power supply plug. Do not damage the cable, make any modifications to it, place heavy objects on top of it, heat it, place it near any hot objects, twist it, bend it excessively or pull it. To do so may cause fire and electric shock. If the power cable is damaged, have it repaired at your local Panasonic dealer.

What may happen if I touch the power supply cord or the plug directly by hand when they are damaged?

Doing so may cause electric shock or fire due to short-circuit.

Where should I keep the supplied AAA/R03/LR03 batteries, M3 screw and washer?

Keep them out of reach of children. If accidentally swallowed, it will be harmful to the body. Contact a doctor immediately if you doubt that the child may have swallowed it.

What should I do to prevent the spread of fire?

Keep candles or other open flames away from this product at all times.

Can I place any objects on top of the display?

No. Do not place any objects on top of the Display. Ventilation should not be impeded by covering the ventilation openings with items such as newspapers, table cloths and curtains. Doing so may cause the Display to overheat, which can cause fire or damage to the Display.

Where should I avoid placing the display?

Do not place the display where it may be affected by salt or corrosive gas. Doing so may cause the display to fall due to corrosion, and it may result in injury. Also, the unit may malfunction.

How many people are required to carry or unpack this unit?

Model	Number of people required
86-inch model 75-inch model	4 or more
65-inch model 55-inch model 50-inch model 43-inch model	2 or more

Where should I hold the display when carrying or moving the 86-inch model or the 75-inch model?

Be sure to hold the handle. If this is not observed, the unit may drop, resulting in injury.

How do I disconnect the power supply cord?

When disconnecting the power supply cord, always pull on the plug (socket outlet side) / the connector (main unit side). Pulling the cord may damage the cord, and it may cause electric shock or fire due to short-circuit.

What should I do before moving the display?

Be sure to disconnect all cables and overturn prevention accessories before moving the Display. If the Display is moved while some of the cables are still connected, the cables may become damaged, and fire or electric shock could result.

When should I disconnect the power supply plug from the wall socket?

Disconnect the power supply plug from the wall socket as a safety precaution before carrying out any cleaning. Electric shocks can result if this is not done.

Can I step on, or hang from the display?

No. Do not step on, or hang from the display. They might tip over, or might be broken and it may result in injury. Pay special attention to the children.

How do I insert the battery?

Do not reverse the polarity (+ and -) of the battery when inserting. Mishandling the battery may cause its explosion or leakage, resulting in fire, injury or damage to surrounding properties. Insert the battery correctly as instructed.

Should I use batteries with the outer cover peeling away or removed?

No. Do not use batteries with the outer cover peeling away or removed. Mishandling the batteries may cause the batteries to short circuit, resulting in fire, injury or damage to surrounding properties.

What should I do with the batteries in the remote control transmitter when not using it for a long period of time?

Remove the batteries. Leaving the batteries in the remote control transmitter when not using it for a long period of time. The battery may leak, heat, ignite or burst, resulting in fire or damage to surrounding properties.

When should I remove exhausted batteries from the remote control?

Immediately. Leaving the batteries unattended in it may cause battery leakage, heat, or burst.

Can I burn or break up batteries?

No. Do not burn or break up batteries. Batteries must not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, or the like.

Can I turn the display upside down?

No. Do not turn the Display upside down.

How do I attach the function board?

1. Remove the screws holding the cover in place.
2. Slide the cover in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
3. Connect the Function Board connector to the connector of the Display.

What are the cautions when moving the display?

• When carrying the display, be sure to hold the handle at the bottom.
• When transporting by vehicle, fix the display to prevent it from moving using ropes, etc.

How do I utilize the Kensington security slot?

This Display is equipped with a Kensington security slot to which a commercially available security cable can be attached.

What should I do before attaching or detaching the eyebolts?

Turn the power off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

How many eyebolts are there?

There are four eyebolts.

How do I attach the eyebolts?

1. Attach the four supplied washers to the eyebolts.
2. Using a coin, etc., turn the eyebolts clockwise to fix them.

What is the maximum load for the eyebolts?

20 kg (44.1 lbs)

What should I do when fixing wires to the eyebolts?

Use commercially available wire fixtures, etc.

How do I connect the AC cord?

Insert the power cord into the AC IN terminal of the Display until it clicks, and insert the power plug into the wall outlet.

How do I fix the AC cord?

Pass the AC cord through the cord clamp and fix it to prevent it from being pulled out.

How do I connect video equipment?

Use commercially available video cables to connect to the Display.

How should I connect video equipment to terminals other than the HDMI IN terminals or the DisplayPort IN terminal?

When connecting to terminals other than the HDMI IN terminals or the DisplayPort IN terminal, use the commercially available conversion adapter to connect.

What should I do before connecting any devices?

Turn the power off to the Display and all devices.

What types of signals are input to the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 and HDMI IN 3 terminals?

The HDMI signals.

What type of cable should I use for connecting to the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 and HDMI IN 3 terminals?

Use a commercially available High Speed HDMI Cable with the HDMI logo.

What type of signal is input to the PC IN terminal?

The analog RGB signals.

What type of cable should I use for connecting to the PC IN terminal?

Use a commercially available RGB cable (with ferrite core). Connect the audio cable for the PC to the AUDIO IN (PC) terminal.

What type of signal is input to the SERIAL IN terminal?

The control signals.

What type of cable should I use for connecting to the SERIAL IN terminal?

Use a commercially available RS-232C cable.

What type of signal is input to the IR IN terminal?

The control signals.

What type of cable should I use for connecting to the IR IN terminal?

Use a commercially available ø 3.5 mm monaural mini plug cable.

What type of signal is output from the IR OUT terminal?

The control signals.

What type of cable should I use for connecting to the IR OUT terminal?

Use a commercially available ø 3.5 mm monaural mini plug cable.

What type of signal is output from the AUDIO OUT terminal?

The audio signals.

What type of cable should I use for connecting to the AUDIO OUT terminal?

Use a commercially available ø 3.5 mm stereo mini plug cable.

What type of signal is input/output to the USB / USB DEVICE terminal?

The control signals / DC 5 V, max 500 mA.

What type of signal is input to the USB-C / USB DEVICE terminal?

The DisplayPort signals and the control signals. The USB-C / USB DEVICE terminal can supply DC 5 V, max 900 mA.

How do I select the input signal?

1. Press the [INPUT] button.
2. Select the input mode using the [▲] / [▼] buttons, and press the [OK] button.

How do I use the RECALL function?

Press the [RECALL] button to display the RECALL list, select the input mode to switch to, and press the [OK] button.

How do I adjust the volume?

1. Press the [VOLUME +] button to increase the volume or the [VOLUME -] button to decrease it.

How do I mute the sound?

Press the [MUTE] button.

How do I set the OFF TIMER?

1. Press the [OFF TIMER] button.
2. Select the time after which the Display is turned off using the [▲] / [▼] buttons.
3. Press the [OK] button.

How do I adjust the aspect ratio?

1. Press the [ASPECT] button.
2. Select the desired aspect ratio using the [▲] / [▼] buttons, and press the [OK] button.

What are the types of aspect adjustments?

• 16:9
• Just
• 4:3
• Zoom
• Native

How do I adjust the 16:9 aspect ratio?

This setting stretches the picture horizontally to fill the 16:9 screen. With HD signals, the picture is displayed in the original size with no side bars.

How do I adjust the Just aspect ratio?

This setting displays the picture at its original size.

How do I adjust the 4:3 aspect ratio?

This setting stretches the picture horizontally to fill the 4:3 screen.

How do I adjust the Zoom aspect ratio?

This setting expands the picture to fill the screen. With this setting, the upper and lower, and right and left edges may not be displayed.

How do I adjust the Native aspect ratio?

This setting displays the picture in the original resolution without any scaling.

How do I zoom the picture?

1. Press the [D.ZOOM] button.
2. Use the cursor buttons to adjust the size of the picture.
3. Press the [OK] button to confirm the setting.

How do I display the On-Screen Menu Displays?

1. Press the [MENU] button to display the main menu screen.
2. Use the [▲] / [▼] buttons to select the desired item.
3. Use the [◄] / [►] buttons to adjust the level.
4. Press the [OK] button to confirm the setting.
5. Press the [MENU] button to close the menu screen.

How do I automatically adjust the picture position and phase?

Press the [AUTO SETUP] button on the remote control to automatically adjust the picture position and phase. If the picture is not adjusted correctly, adjust it manually in the [Picture] menu.

How do I adjust the sound?

The [Sound] menu allows you to adjust the sound quality of the TV speakers.

What are the types of sound adjustments?

• Mode
• Treble
• Bass
• Balance
• Surround

How do I adjust the sound mode?

This setting lets you select the sound quality from the preset modes.

What are the sound mode selections?

• Standard
• Music
• Speech
• User

How do I adjust the sound treble?

This setting emphasizes the high-pitched tones in the sound.

How do I adjust the sound bass?

This setting emphasizes the low-pitched tones in the sound.

How do I adjust the sound balance?

This setting adjusts the relative volume of the left and right speakers.

How do I adjust the sound surround?

This setting adds a surround effect to the sound.

How do I adjust the picture?

The [Picture] menu allows you to adjust the picture quality of the display.

What are the types of picture adjustments?

• Picture Mode
• Contrast
• Brightness
• Color
• Tint
• Sharpness
• Color Temperature
• Noise Reduction
• MPEG Noise Reduction
• Black Level
• Gamma
• Dynamic Range

How do I adjust the picture mode?

This setting lets you select the picture quality from the preset modes.

What are the picture mode selections?

• Dynamic
• Normal
• Cinema
• True Cinema
• Custom

How do I adjust the picture contrast?

This setting adjusts the difference between the light and dark areas of the picture.

How do I adjust the picture brightness?

This setting adjusts the overall brightness of the picture.

How do I adjust the picture color?

This setting adjusts the color saturation of the picture.

How do I adjust the picture tint?

This setting adjusts the balance between red and green in the picture.

How do I adjust the picture sharpness?

This setting adjusts the clarity of the edges of objects in the picture.

How do I adjust the picture color temperature?

This setting adjusts the overall color tone of the picture.

What are the picture color temperature selections?

• Cool
• Normal
• Warm

How do I adjust the picture noise reduction?

This setting reduces the amount of random noise in the picture.

What are the picture noise reduction selections?

• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High

How do I adjust the picture MPEG noise reduction?

This setting reduces the amount of block noise in MPEG-compressed video.

What are the picture MPEG noise reduction selections?

• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High

How do I adjust the picture black level?

This setting adjusts the level of black in the picture.

What are the picture black level selections?

• Light
• Normal
• Dark

How do I adjust the picture gamma?

This setting adjusts the overall brightness curve of the picture.

What are the picture gamma selections?

• 1.8
• 2.0
• 2.2
• 2.4

How do I adjust the picture dynamic range?

This setting adjusts the contrast range of the picture.

What are the picture dynamic range selections?

• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High

What are picture profiles?

Picture profiles are a set of picture settings that can be saved and loaded. This allows you to quickly switch between different picture settings for different types of content or viewing environments.

How do I save a picture profile?

1. Adjust the picture settings to your liking.
2. Press the [MENU] button.
3. Select [Picture] – [Picture Profiles] – [Save].
4. Select a profile number to save the settings to.
5. Press the [OK] button.

How do I load a picture profile?

1. Press the [MENU] button.
2. Select [Picture] – [Picture Profiles] – [Load].
3. Select the profile number to load.
4. Press the [OK] button.

How do I edit a picture profile?

1. Press the [MENU] button.
2. Select [Picture] – [Picture Profiles] – [Edit].
3. Select the profile number to edit.
4. Adjust the picture settings to your liking.
5. Press the [OK] button.

What is the setup menu?

The [Setup] menu allows you to adjust various settings for the display.

What are the setup options?

• Signal
• Power on settings
• Input search
• Failover/Failback
• Screensaver
• Input label
• Input skip settings
• Power management settings
• Audio input select
• External device link settings
• HDMI-CEC settings
• Image settings
• Input lock
• Off-timer function
• No activity power off
• OSD language
• Multi display settings
• Portrait settings
• Whiteboard settings
• Video conference mode settings
• Set up timer
• Date and time
• Network settings
• USB media player settings
• Memory viewer settings
• Screen Transfer settings
• Wireless presentation settings
• Function button settings
• Colour design settings
• OSD settings
• Options
• Control settings
• Information timing
• Mode settings
• Restriction settings
• SLOT settings

How do I adjust the signal settings?

The [Signal] menu allows you to adjust the settings for the input signal.

What are the signal options?

• 3D Settings
• HDMI HDR Settings
• HDMI Signal Format
• DisplayPort Signal Format
• HDCP Setting
• Auto Detect Input Signals

How do I adjust the 3D settings?

This setting allows you to adjust the 3D settings for the display.

What are the 3D settings options?

• 3D Mode
• 3D Depth
• 3D-2D Conversion

How do I adjust the 3D mode?

This setting allows you to select the 3D mode for the display.

What are the 3D mode selections?

• Off
• Side by Side
• Top and Bottom

How do I adjust the 3D depth?

This setting allows you to adjust the depth of the 3D image.

How do I adjust the 3D-2D conversion?

This setting allows you to convert a 3D signal to a 2D signal.

How do I adjust the HDMI HDR settings?

This setting allows you to adjust the HDR settings for the HDMI input.

What are the HDMI HDR settings options?

• HDR Mode
• HDR Brightness
• HDR Contrast
• HDR Color

How do I adjust the HDR mode?

This setting allows you to select the HDR mode for the HDMI input.

What are the HDR mode selections?

• Off
• Auto
• HDR10
• HLG

How do I adjust the HDR brightness?

This setting allows you to adjust the brightness of the HDR image.

How do I adjust the HDR contrast?

This setting allows you to adjust the contrast of the HDR image.

How do I adjust the HDR color?

This setting allows you to adjust the color of the HDR image.

How do I adjust the HDMI signal format?

This setting allows you to select the signal format for the HDMI input.

What are the HDMI signal format selections?

• Auto
• RGB
• YCbCr4:4:4
• YCbCr4:2:2

How do I adjust the DisplayPort signal format?

This setting allows you to select the signal format for the DisplayPort input.

What are the DisplayPort signal format selections?

• Auto
• RGB
• YCbCr4:4:4
• YCbCr4:2:2

How do I adjust the HDCP setting?

This setting allows you to select the HDCP version for the HDMI and DisplayPort inputs.

What are the HDCP setting selections?

• Auto
• 1.4
• 2.2

How do I automatically detect input signals?

When this function is set to [On], the input signal is automatically detected and the display switches to the appropriate input mode.

What are the power on settings?

This setting allows you to select the input mode when the display is turned on.

What are the power on setting options?

• Last input
• Specific input

How do I select the last input setting?

The display will turn on with the same input mode as the one last viewed.

How do I select the specific input setting?

The display will turn on with the input mode selected in the [Specific input] setting.

How do I use the input search?

This setting allows you to select the input terminals that are searched when the display is turned on.

What are the input search options?

• All terminals
• Specific terminals

How do I select all terminals?

All input terminals will be searched.

How do I select specific terminals?

Only the selected input terminals will be searched.

What is the Failover/Failback function?

This function allows you to automatically switch to a backup input signal if the primary input signal is lost.

What are the Failover/Failback settings?

• Failover
• Failback

How do I adjust the Failover function?

This setting allows you to enable or disable the Failover function.

What are the Failover selections?

• Off
• On

How do I adjust the Failback function?

This setting allows you to enable or disable the Failback function.

What are the Failback selections?

• Off
• On
• Manual

What is the Screensaver function?

This setting allows you to set the display to automatically enter screensaver mode if no signal is input for a certain period of time.

How do I enable or disable the Screensaver function?

Select [On] or [Off] in the Screensaver menu.

How do I change the input label?

This setting allows you to change the label for each input terminal.

What are the Input label options?

• HDMI IN 1
• HDMI IN 2
• HDMI IN 3
• DisplayPort IN
• VIDEO IN
• PC IN
• USB-C IN

How do I connect the AC cord for the 86-inch model?

Plug the connector into the display unit until it clicks, ensuring that the connector is locked on both the left and right sides.

How do I unplug the AC cord for the 86-inch model?

Unplug the connector by pressing the two knobs. Ensure that the AC cord’s knobs are not damaged, as this can result in a bad connection between the AC cord connector and the AC IN terminal. If the knobs are damaged, consult the dealer where the product was purchased for repair. Always disconnect the AC cord plug at the socket outlet first. The supplied AC cord is exclusively for this unit and should not be used for other purposes.

How do I connect the AC cord for the 50-inch and 43-inch models?

Insert the AC cord securely all the way into the back of the unit. Always disconnect the AC cord plug at the socket outlet first. The supplied AC cord is exclusively for this unit and should not be used for other purposes.

How many clampers are supplied with the unit?

Two clampers are supplied with this unit. Additional clampers can be purchased from the dealer.

How do I attach the clamper?

Wipe off any dirt, such as dust, water, and oil, from the attachment surface. Affix the clamper by firmly pushing it onto the surface. Note that once the clamper is affixed, it cannot be reused. It is crucial to confirm the attaching position before affixing it.

Where should I attach the clamper?

For the 86-inch, 75-inch, and 65-inch models, attach the clamper at location 1. For the 55-inch, 50-inch, and 43-inch models, attach the clamper at location 1 for the signal cable.

How do I affix the clamper to a flat surface?

Remove the tape on the back of the clamper and affix it to the flat surface.

How do I bundle the cables using the clamper?

Pass the tip of the band through the hooks of the clamper. Then, pull the band and hook it onto the knob. To loosen the band, remove it from the knob and pull out the band tip.

What precautions should I take when installing the display?

• The display is designed for indoor use only.
• Install the unit in a location that can support its weight to prevent injury from dropping or falling.
• Avoid installing near high-voltage lines or power sources to prevent interference.
• Keep the unit away from heat appliances to avoid deformation or malfunction.
• Do not install the unit at altitudes of 2,800 meters (9,186 feet) or higher, as this may shorten the lifespan of internal parts and cause malfunctions.

What is the recommended environmental temperature for using the display?

• Below 1,400 meters (4,593 feet) above sea level: 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
• At high altitudes (1,400 meters (4,593 feet) and higher, but below 2,800 meters (9,186 feet) above sea level): 0°C to 35°C (32°F to 95°F)

Why should I transport the unit only in an upright position?

Transporting the unit with its liquid crystal panel facing upright or downward may cause damage to the internal circuitry.

What precautions should I take with the liquid crystal panel?

• Avoid grabbing or forcibly pressing the liquid crystal panel, or pushing it with a pointed object. Applying excessive force can cause unevenness in the screen display and malfunction.
• Do not install the product in a location exposed to direct sunlight, even indoors. Direct sunlight can cause the liquid crystal panel to overheat, potentially leading to malfunction.

What are the storage recommendations for the display?

When not in use for an extended period, store the unit in a dry room. Unplug the power supply plug from the wall outlet. Avoid storing the product in a location exposed to direct sunlight during long periods of storage with no power supplied.

What should I consider regarding ventilation when installing the unit?

If installing the unit in a case or chassis, ensure adequate ventilation by providing a cooling fan or ventilation hole. This will maintain the temperature surrounding the unit, including the front surface of the liquid crystal panel, within the operating temperature range.

What is the recommended screw pitch and depth of the screw hole for installing the display onto a wall-hanging bracket?

Inch model	Screw pitch for installation	Depth of screw hole	Screw (quantity)
86 600 mm × 400 mm	20 mm	20 mm	M8 (4)
75 600 mm × 400 mm	20 mm	20 mm	M8 (4)
65 400 mm × 400 mm	20 mm	20 mm	M8 (4)
55 400 mm × 400 mm	18 mm	18 mm	M6 (4)
50 400 mm × 400 mm	20 mm	20 mm	M6 (4)
43 200 mm × 200 mm	16 mm	16 mm	M6 (4)

Ensure that all screws are securely tightened.

What should I do if the power cord and connection cables are difficult to remove and insert after wall installation?

Make all connections before installing the display on the wall. Take care to prevent cable entanglement. Once installation is complete, insert the power plug into the outlet.

What should I do if a still image remains on the screen after displaying it for an extended period?

This is known as image retention. It is a normal occurrence and will disappear when a general moving picture is displayed for a while.

Why might the screen display become invisible when wearing polarized sunglasses?

This phenomenon is due to the deflection characteristics of the liquid crystal panel and is not a malfunction.

Are red, blue, or green dots on the screen a cause for concern?

These dots are a normal phenomenon specific to liquid crystal panels and do not indicate a malfunction.

What is the dot omission ratio for the different inch models?

Inch model	Dot omission ratio*
86	0.00009% or less
75	0.00007% or less
65	0.00005% or less
55	0.00005% or less
50	0.00005% or less
43	0.00005% or less

* Calculated in sub-pixel units according to the ISO09241-307 standard.

What might cause uneven brightness in certain conditions?

Uneven brightness can occur in specific conditions but is not a malfunction. This unevenness typically disappears with continuous current application. If the unevenness persists, consult the distributor.

What should I do if picture noise occurs when connecting or disconnecting cables to unused input terminals, or when turning the power of video equipment on or off?

This is not a malfunction.

What precautions should I take when setting up the display in a location where static electricity occurs frequently?

Implement sufficient antistatic measures before using the display in such locations, especially on carpets, as static electricity can cause frequent disconnections in wired LAN communication. Consider using an antistatic mat to remove static electricity and noise sources that may interfere with the connection. If the LAN connection is disabled due to static electricity or noise, turn off the power of the display and connected devices, then turn them back on.

What should I do if the display is affected by strong radio waves from a nearby broadcast station or radio?

If strong radio wave sources are present near the installation location, position the display sufficiently far from the source. Alternatively, wrap the LAN cable connected to the LAN terminal with grounded metal foil or a metal pipe to minimize interference.

What security measures should I take when using the unit?

Take necessary precautions to safeguard against potential security risks such as personal information leaks, unauthorized operation by malicious third parties, and interference or disruption by malicious third parties. Implement the following security measures:

• Set a strong password for LAN control and restrict user login access.
• Make the password difficult to guess and change it periodically.
• Be aware that Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. or its affiliates will never directly request your password. Do not disclose your password if you receive such inquiries.
• Use appropriate security software, such as a firewall.
• Initialize all data before disposing of the product.

How should I clean and maintain the display?

1. Unplug the mains plug from the mains socket.
2. Use a soft cloth to gently wipe the surface of the liquid crystal panel or cabinet to remove dirt.
3. For stubborn dirt or fingerprints on the liquid crystal panel, dampen a cloth with diluted neutral detergent (1 part detergent to 100 parts water). Wring out the cloth thoroughly and wipe away the dirt. Finally, wipe the surface with a dry cloth to remove all moisture. Avoid getting water droplets inside the unit, as this may cause operating problems.

What precautions should I take when cleaning the liquid crystal panel?

The surface of the liquid crystal panel has a special treatment. Do not use a hard cloth or rub the surface excessively, as this can cause scratches.

Can I use a chemical cloth to clean the display?

Avoid using a chemical cloth on the liquid crystal panel surface. For the cabinet, follow the instructions provided for the chemical cloth.

What substances should I avoid contact with the display?

Avoid contact with volatile substances such as insect sprays, solvents, and thinners. These substances can damage the cabinet or cause paint to peel. Additionally, prolonged contact with rubber or PVC substances should be avoided.

How do I maintain the ventilation holes?

Dust and dirt may accumulate near the ventilation holes depending on the usage environment. This can hinder internal cooling and exhaust heat circulation, potentially leading to decreased brightness or malfunction. Regularly clean and remove dust from the ventilation holes.

What should I do when disposing of the product?

Consult your local authority or dealer for proper disposal methods.

What accessories are included with the display?

Accessory	Quantity	Part Number
Remote Control Transmitter	1	DPVF1615ZA
Batteries for the Remote Control Transmitter	2	AAA/R03/LR03 type
Clamper	2	DPVF1654ZA
SLOT adapter	1	DPVF2722YA/X1
Power supply cord (TH-86EQ2W)	1	Approx. 2 m
Power supply cord (TH-65EQ2W/55EQ2W/50EQ2W/43EQ2W)	1	Approx. 2 m

Note that the part numbers of accessories are subject to change without notice. The actual part number may differ from those listed above. If any accessories are lost, contact your dealer or customer service for replacements. Dispose of the packaging materials properly after removing the items. Store small parts appropriately and keep them away from young children.

How do I insert the batteries into the remote control?

Open the battery cover. Insert the AAA/R03/LR03 type batteries, starting from the “+” side, and close the battery cover.

What precautions should I take when handling the batteries?

Incorrect battery installation can cause leakage and corrosion, damaging the remote control. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Observe the following precautions:

1. Always replace batteries in pairs.
2. Do not mix used and new batteries.
3. Do not use different battery types together (e.g., manganese dioxide and alkaline batteries).
4. Do not attempt to charge, disassemble, or burn used batteries.
5. Do not burn or break up batteries.
6. Do not expose batteries to excessive heat such as sunshine or fire.

How do I attach a narrow-width function board to the display?

1. Turn off the display unit and connected devices, unplug the power cord, and disconnect all cables.
2. Remove one screw from the side of the SLOT adapter with the guide.
3. Fit the circuit board of the function board into the guides of the SLOT adapter. Ensure secure contact between the circuit board and the hook (one location) and the end faces (two locations).
4. Using the removed screw, fix the function board to the SLOT adapter. The tightening torque guideline is 0.5 N·m or less.
5. Ensure that the screw is firmly tightened and the hook of the SLOT adapter securely fixes the circuit board.
6. Verify that the surfaces of the SLOT adapter and the circuit board are aligned when viewed from the opposite side of the cover.
7. Ensure horizontal alignment of the indicated side for proper attachment.
8. Note that if there is a lead wire within approximately 3 mm from the end face of the circuit board, the function board cannot be attached due to interference with the guide rail. Ensure that there is no lead wire in this range.

How do I remove the expansion slot cover or function board from the display unit?

To remove the function board, hold its handle and pull it out slowly in the direction of the arrow. Keep the removed function board or cover, as they may be required for future repairs or servicing.

How do I attach a full-size function board to the display?

1. Follow steps 4 and 5 from the instructions for attaching a narrow-width function board.
2. Insert the function board into the expansion slot and tighten the two screws that were removed in step 4.
3. The tightening torque guideline is 0.5 N·m or less.
4. When inserting the function board, avoid contact with the edge of the expansion slot opening to prevent damage to the display unit and function board.

How should I move the 86-inch, 75-inch, and 65-inch models?

These models have handles specifically designed for carrying. Use these handles when moving the display. Avoid holding any parts other than the handles.

How many people are required to carry the different inch models?

Inch model	Number of people required
86-inch / 75-inch	4 or more
65-inch / 55-inch / 50-inch / 43-inch	2 or more

Failure to observe these guidelines may result in the unit dropping and causing injury.

What precautions should I take when carrying the display?

• Maintain an upright position for the liquid crystal panel during carrying. Carrying the unit with the panel facing up or down may deform the panel or cause internal damage.
• Do not hold the upper, lower, right, or left frames, or the corners of the unit. Avoid holding or hitting the front surface of the liquid crystal panel, as this can damage the panel or cause it to crack, potentially resulting in injury.

Is the display compatible with Kensington security slots?

Yes, the security slot of this unit is compatible with Kensington security slots for all inch models.

Do the displays have eyebolts for suspension?

The 86-inch and 75-inch models have holes for attaching M10 eyebolts. These eyebolts can be used for temporary suspension or movement during installation but are not intended for permanent hanging installations. The 65-inch, 55-inch, 50-inch, and 43-inch models do not have eyebolt holes.

Where should I attach the eyebolts on the 86-inch and 75-inch models?

Attach the eyebolts to the two designated eyebolt mounting positions. Eyebolt installation should be performed by a qualified professional. Do not suspend the display using only one eyebolt.

What type of eyebolts should I use?

Use commercially available M10 eyebolts that meet the product quality load conditions and have a shank length of 12 mm to 40 mm. The eyebolts should conform to the ISO 3266 standard. Ensure that the hanging angle is 60° or more. Use ISO standard members (e.g., wire) for hanging.

How can I control the display by connecting to a PC?

Control the Display by connecting to PC using the SERIAL IN: SERIAL Input Terminal.

How can I control the display by connecting to the network?

Control the Display by connecting to the Network using the LAN: LAN Terminal.

What should I use to connect to audio equipment with an analogue audio input terminal?

Connect to audio equipment with an analogue audio input terminal using the AUDIO OUT: Analogue Audio Output Terminal.

What is the function of the AUDIO IN: Analogue Audio Input Terminal?

It is an Analogue Audio Input Terminal.

What is the function of the PC IN: PC Input Terminal?

Connect to video terminal of PC, video equipment with “YPBPR / YCBCR” or “RGB” output using the PC IN: PC Input Terminal.

What is the function of the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2, HDMI IN 3: HDMI Input Terminals?

Connect to video equipment with HDMI output using the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2, HDMI IN 3: HDMI Input Terminals. Also, the HDMI IN 3 terminal outputs audio by connecting it to an ARC-compatible device.

What is the function of the USB: USB Terminal?

Connect the USB memory to use “USB media player” or “Memory viewer” using the USB: USB Terminal. Also, this can be used to supply power of up to 5V/max 1 A to an external device when the picture is displayed.

What is the function of the USB-C HOST: USB-C terminal?

Connect a PC or video equipment that has a USB-C terminal using the USB-C HOST: USB-C terminal. Also, this can be used to supply power of up to 60 W to an external device when the picture is displayed.

What is the function of the USB DEVICE: USB terminal?

USB communication with devices connected to the USB-C HOST terminal is possible using the USB DEVICE: USB terminal. Also, when the USB memory is connected, the “USB media player” or “Memory viewer” function can be used. Also, this can be used to supply power of up to 5 V/max 2 A to an external device when the picture is displayed.

What is the function of the IR IN, IR OUT: Infrared Signal Input / Output Terminal?

Use the IR IN, IR OUT: Infrared Signal Input / Output Terminal when operating more than one display with one remote control.

What is the function of the SLOT: Expansion slot?

It is an Expansion slot.

What should I do before connecting cables to the display?

Before connecting cables, carefully read the operating instructions for the external device to be connected. Turn off the power of all devices before connecting cables. Take note of the following points before connecting the cables as failure to do so may result in malfunctions:

• When connecting a cable to the unit or a device connected to the unit itself, touch any nearby metallic objects to eliminate static electricity from your body before performing work.
• Do not use unnecessarily long cables to connect a device to the unit or to the unit body. The longer the cable, the more susceptible to noise it becomes. Since using a cable while it is wound makes it act like an antenna, it is more susceptible to noise.
• When connecting cables, insert them straight into the connecting terminal of the connecting device so that the ground is connected first.

What should I do if I need a cable to connect an external device to the system that is neither supplied with the device nor available as an option?

Acquire any cable necessary to connect the external device to the system.

What should I consider when connecting cables with large plugs?

If the outer shape of the plug of a connection cable is large, it may come in contact with the periphery such as a back cover or the plug of an adjacent connection cable. Use a connection cable with the suitable plug size for the terminal alignment.

What should I be aware of when connecting the LAN cable with plug cover?

When connecting the LAN cable with plug cover, be aware that the cover may come in contact with the back cover and it may be difficult to disconnect.

What should I do if video signals from video equipment contain too much jitter?

If video signals from video equipment contain too much jitter, the images on the screen may wobble. In this case, a time base corrector (TBC) must be connected.

What might happen when the sync signals output from PC or video equipment are disturbed?

When the sync signals output from PC or video equipment are disturbed, for example, when changing settings of video output, the colour of the video may be disturbed temporarily.

What type of signals does the unit accept?

The unit accepts, YPBPR/YCBCR signals (PC IN), analogue RGB signals (PC IN) and digital signals.

Are all PC models compatible with the unit?

Some PC models are not compatible with the unit.

When should I use a cable compensator?

Use cable compensator when you connect devices to the unit using long cables. Otherwise the image may not be displayed properly.

What should I refer to for the types of video signals that can be displayed with the unit?

Refer to “Preset Signals” for the types of video signals that can be displayed with the unit.

What should I connect to the HDMI IN 3 terminal?

Be sure to connect the ARC audio device to the HDMI IN 3 terminal.

Which HDMI terminal supports ARC?

Only the HDMI IN 3 terminal supports ARC.

What type of cable should I connect to the PC input terminal?

Connect a cable which matches the audio output terminal on the computer.

What is the maximum display resolution?

The display resolution is a maximum of 1 440 x 1 080 dots when the aspect mode is set to [Normal], and 1 920 x 1 080 dots when the aspect mode is set to [Full]. If the display resolution exceeds these maximums, it may not be possible to show fine detail with sufficient clarity.

What happens if signals outside the range of supported frequencies are input?

If signals outside the range of supported frequencies are input, normal images cannot be displayed. Note that some images may not be correctly displayed even if signals are within the range.

What should I do if the PC screen is not displayed?

If the PC screen is not displayed, check if the image signal of the PC meets “Preset Signals”, and then change the settings. For power-saving purpose, image output may be OFF on a notebook computer. In this case, it may be set to ON with function key operation etc. of the computer. (Refer to the manual of the computer.)

What type of video signal does the Mini D-sub 15P terminal support?

Component video signal is supported with this terminal (Mini D-sub 15P). Select an input signal mode with [Setup] – [PC input mode] according to the input signal.

What synchronized signals are supported depending on the [PC input mode] setting?

According to the [PC input mode] setting, the synchronized signal supports the following inputs only:

• [PC]: HD/VD signal input only
• [PC[YPBPR]]: Only the synchronized signal superimposed on Y signal input

Do I need to make setting changes to the computer at the time of connection if the computer being connected is not DDC2B-compatible?

If the computer being connected is not DDC2B-compatible, you will need to make setting changes to the computer at the time of connection.

What should I use when connecting a computer equipped with a D-sub15 pin terminal or a Mac?

When connecting a computer equipped with a D-sub15 pin terminal or a Mac, use a commercially sold conversion adapter as necessary.

Do I need to use an adapter for computers with DOS/V compatible Mini D-sub 15P terminal?

There is no need to use an adapter for computers with DOS/V compatible Mini D-sub 15P terminal.

What should I avoid doing when setting the horizontal and vertical scanning frequencies for PC signals?

Do not set the horizontal and vertical scanning frequencies for PC signals which are above or below the specified frequency range.

What interface specification does the SERIAL terminal conform to?

The SERIAL terminal conforms to the RS-232C interface specification, so that the Display can be controlled by a computer which is connected to this terminal.

What cable should I select when connecting the SERIAL terminal and computer?

Select the RS-232C straight cable for communication used for connecting SERIAL terminal and computer according to the computer you are using.

What are the communication parameters?

• Signal level: RS-232C compliant
• Synchronization method: Asynchronous
• Baud rate: 9 600 bps
• Parity: None
• Character length: 8 bits
• Stop bit: 1 bit
• Flow control: None

What is the basic format for control data?

The transmission of control data from the computer starts with a STX signal, followed by the command, the parameters, and lastly an ETX signal in that order. Add parameters as required according to control details.

STX C1 C2 C3 P1 P2 P3 P4: P5 ETX

What should I do if multiple commands are transmitted?

If multiple commands are transmitted, be sure to wait for the response for the first command to come from this unit before sending the next command.

What will the unit send back to the computer if an incorrect command is sent by mistake?

If an incorrect command is sent by mistake, this unit will send an “ER401” command back to the computer.

Is a colon (:) needed when sending a command which does not require parameter?

When sending a command which does not require parameter, a colon (:) is not needed.

How do I connect the IR IN / IR OUT terminal?

Connect the stereo mini plug (M3) cable from the IR OUT terminal of the first display to the IR IN terminal of the second display. The infrared signal of the first display is sent to the second display. In this case, the IR (infrared ray reception on the remote control sensor) on the second display does not operate. Repeating the above connections enables the daisy chain connection.

Is daisy chain connection possible between displays of different series?

Daisy chain connection is possible only between the displays of the same series.

What setting should I change to output sound from AUDIO OUT terminal of the unit?

To output sound from AUDIO OUT terminal of the unit, be sure to set [Output select] in the [Sound] menu to [AUDIO OUT].

What should I connect to use “USB media player” or “Memory viewer”?

Connect the USB memory to use “USB media player” or “Memory viewer”. Connect a USB mouse to use the mouse annotation function. Also, power is supplied when a separately sold stick PC, etc. are connected.

What does the connection example of the USB DEVICE terminal show?

The connection example of the USB DEVICE terminal shows the case where connection to the internal system of the main unit is made as described in [USB (DEVICE) connect setting].

Can I connect a USB device or USB memory to both the USB terminal and USB DEVICE terminal?

A USB device or USB memory can be connected to the USB terminal and USB DEVICE terminal respectively.

What happens when more than one USB memory is connected?

When more than one USB memory is connected, only the first connected one is enabled. When more than one USB memory is connected, those connected second and later are disabled. When more than one USB memory is connected, and if all but one are disconnected, the last one remaining connected is enabled. When more than one USB memory is connected when the unit is powered on, only one of them is enabled depending on the specifications of the USB memories. To enable a target USB memory when the unit is powered on, connect only the target USB memory when the unit is powered on.

What may happen if the power is turned off or the USB memory device is removed while accessing data in the USB memory device?

If the power is turned off or the USB memory device is removed while accessing data in the USB memory device, the stored data may be destroyed. The access indicator of the USB memory device blinks during data access.

Can the USB memory device be connected or disconnected whether or not the display is on?

The USB memory device can be connected or disconnected whether or not the display is on.

What should I do if the direct connection to this unit is not possible due to the size of a stick PC?

If the direct connection to this unit is not possible due to the size of a stick PC, etc. use a commercially sold extension cable.

What should I do when connecting the USB memory device?

When connecting the USB memory device, confirm the orientation of the plug to prevent damage to the terminal.

What should I note when removing the USB memory device?

When removing the USB memory device, note the following:

• When the access indicator of the connected USB memory device is blinking, it shows the display is loading the data. Do not remove the USB memory device while blinking.

What does it mean when the access indicator of the USB memory device may remain blinking even when it is not being accessed, or the device is not equipped with an access indicator function?

In this case, remove the USB memory device after confirming the following or :

• Switch the input to an input other than [USB], [MEMORY VIEWER] and [WHITEBOARD], and confirm that the functions that access USB memory device are finished. The functions are, read user image function, playlist edit function, data cloning function, etc.
• Turn the unit off.

Should I frequently repeat connecting/disconnecting the USB memory device?

Do not frequently repeat connecting/disconnecting the USB memory device. Wait at least 5 seconds after connection, and then remove the USB memory device. Before reconnection, wait at least 5 seconds. A certain length of time is required so that the display can recognise that the USB memory device is switched for connection or disconnection.

What may happen if the power of this unit is turned off or the USB memory device is removed accidentally while accessing data?

If the power of this unit is turned off or the USB memory device is removed accidentally while accessing data, the data may not be accessed next time the USB memory device is used. In such a case, turn the power of the main unit off and on.

What type of cable should I use when the power is supplied from the USB DEVICE (5V, max 2A)?

When the power is supplied from the USB DEVICE (5V, max 2A), use a cable supporting a current of 2A or more.

What does the USB-C terminal of this unit support?

The USB-C terminal of this unit supports multiple protocols and a maximum power supply of 60 W. The terminal is compatible with devices that meet the USB-Type-C specification. Connection is possible with source devices that support the DisplayPort Alternative Mode (DP Alt Mode). The USB DEVICE terminal enables USB communication with a connection destination set in [USB (DEVICE) connect setting], and is able to supply power of up to 5 V/max 2 A to external devices. In addition, when a USB-C terminal-compatible PC is connected to the USB-C terminal, and a USB peripheral device is connected to the USB DEVICE terminal, USB data communication is possible via pass-through between the PC and the USB peripheral device.

Can the “USB media player” and “Memory viewer” function be used from the USB-C terminal?

The “USB media player” and “Memory viewer” function cannot be used from the USB-C terminal.

What type of USB-C cable should I use when streaming video through Type-C connection?

When streaming video through Type-C connection, use a USB-C cable electronically authenticated as USB-C.

What does the connection example of the USB DEVICE terminal show?

The connection example of the USB DEVICE terminal shows the case where connection to the 6106 terminal is made as described in [USB (DEVICE) connect setting].

What should I do if a USB device connected to the USB DEVICE terminal is recognized by the PC connected to the USB-C terminal when [USB (DEVICE) connect setting] is set to [Auto], and switching the display input may not recognize the USB device depending on the type of USB device?

In this case, set [USB (DEVICE) connect setting] to [USB-C] or connect the USB device to the USB terminal for use.

What may happen if the electric current exceeding the power supplying capability is applied?

If the electric current exceeding the power supplying capability is applied, the output is blocked, and the following message is displayed. [USB overload. Please remove cable or equipment, then turn the display off/on.] If an electric current exceeding the power supplying capability is applied in standby state, the output is blocked, and the power indicator blinks in purple. In this case, remove the equipment and then turn the power off/on using the remote control, etc. When [Power on settings] – [Quick start] is set to [On] in standby state, disconnect and connect the power plug from/to the outlet, or turn off and on the <Main Power On / Off button>.

What will the Power Indicator light up as when the power of the unit is ON?

The Power Indicator will light. When the power of the unit is ON (Main Power On / Off button ( ): ON), the Power Indicator will light up as follows:

• Picture is displayed: blue
• When the unit enters the standby mode using the following functions: purple

What are the standby mode functions that will cause the Power Indicator to light up as purple?

• Standby state with the “Quick start” function
• Standby state with the “Power management” function
• Standby state with [HDMI-CEC control] set to [Enable] and at least one [Link function] set to other than [Disable]
• Standby state with [Network control] set to [On]
• Standby state with the “SLOT standby” function
• Standby state during schedule play mode

What colour will the Power Indicator light up as when in standby state in conditions other than the above?

orange

What will happen to the Power Indicator when the power of the unit is OFF?

When the power of the unit is OFF (Main Power On / Off button: OFF), there will be no light.

Are all circuits in power-off status when the unit is turned off with the power indicator off?

Even if the unit is turned off with the power indicator off, some of the circuits are in power-on status.

How does the power consumption during standby compare when the power indicator is purple and orange?

When the power indicator is purple, power consumption during standby is generally larger than that of when the power indicator is orange.

When will the power indicator not light up?

When [Power LED light-up setting] is set to [Off], the power indicator does not light up.

What does the External input / output terminal connect to?

Connects to video equipment, PC, etc.

What does the Main power switch ( ) (Unit) do?

Turns OFF ( ) or ON ( ) the main power. Turning ON and OFF the <Main power switch> is the same as plugging and unplugging the power plug.

Should you turn ON ( ) the main power first, and then turn OFF or ON the power using the Power button of the remote control or the unit?

Yes.

What does the <Main Power On / Off button> ( ) do?

Turns the power On / Off.

What does the <INPUT (Unit)> do?

Selects the connected device.

What does the <MENU (Unit)> do?

Adjusts the volume. On the menu screen, switches settings or adjusts settings level.

What does the < (Unit)> / < (Unit)> do?

Selects the setting item on menu screen.

What does the <ENTER (Unit)> do?

Configures the item on menu screen. Switches aspect mode.

Where is the sound output from the built-in speakers?

Sound is output backward.

To output sound from the built-in speakers of the unit, what must be done?

Be sure to set [Sound] – [Output select] to [SPEAKERS].

What does the Standby (ON/OFF) button ( ) do?

Turns the power on or off when the unit is turned on at the <Main Power On / Off button>.

What do the ENTER / Cursor buttons ( ) do?

Used to operate the menu screens.

What does the ZOOM button do?

Enters the digital zoom mode.

What does the DEFAULT button do?

Resets the settings of picture, sound, etc., to defaults.

What does the MUTE button do?

Sound mute on / off.

What does the ASPECT button do?

Adjusts the aspect.

What does the VOL + / VOL – button do?

Adjusts sound volume level.

What does the AUTO SETUP button do?

Automatically adjusts the position/size of the screen.

What does the INPUT button do?

Switches input to display on the screen.

What does the RECALL button do?

Displays the current setting status of Input mode, Aspect mode, etc.

What does the RETURN button do?

Used to return to the previous menu.

What does the FUNCTION button do?

Displays [Function button guide].

What does the OFF TIMER button do?

Switches to stand-by after a fixed period.

What do the Numeric buttons (1 – 6) do?

Used as shortcut buttons by assigning frequently used operations.

What are the buttons of the remote control and the unit indicated as?

In this PDF, buttons of the remote control and the unit are indicated as < >. (Example: <INPUT>.) The operation is mainly explained indicating the remote control buttons but you can also operate with the buttons on the unit when there are the same buttons.

What should you point the remote control directly at when operating the unit?

Operate pointing the remote control directly at the unit’s Remote Control Sensor.

Should you put an obstacle between the remote control sensor of the main unit and the remote control?

No.

Where should you operate the remote control?

Operate the remote control in front of the remote control sensor or from the area where the sensor can be seen.

When directly aiming the remote control at the remote control sensor of the main unit, what should the distance from the front of remote control sensor be?

When directly aiming the remote control at the remote control sensor of the main unit, the distance from the front of remote control sensor should be approx. 7 m or less.

Why might the operation distance be shorter?

Depending on the angle, the operation distance may be shorter.

Should you subject the remote control sensor of the main unit to the direct sunlight or strong fluorescent light?

No.

When disconnecting the AC cord, what must be done?

When disconnecting the AC cord, be absolutely sure to disconnect the AC cord plug at the socket outlet first.

Why might the settings not be saved?

The settings may not be saved if the power plug is disconnected immediately after changing settings with on-screen menu.

What should be done to save the settings?

Disconnect the power plug after a enough period of time. Or, disconnect the power plug after turning the power off with the remote control, RS-232C control or LAN control.

How do you turn the power of the unit on?

Turn ON ( ) the <Main power switch ( )> on the unit. Then, press the <Main Power On / Off button> ( ) on the unit to turn the power of the unit on.

What does it mean when the Power Indicator is blue?

Picture is displayed.

What does it mean when the power indicator lights up?

When the power of the unit is on, the power indicator lights up and remote control operation is possible.

When the power indicator is lit, do you need to press the <Main Power On / Off button> ( ) on the unit?

No. Operate the remote control so that the power indicator turns blue (picture is displayed).

How do you turn the power on?

When the <Main power switch> is ON ( ) (Power Indicator – orange or purple), press <Standby (ON/ OFF) button> then the picture will be displayed.

How do you turn the power off?

When the <Main power switch> is ON ( ) (Power Indicator – blue), press <Standby (ON/OFF) button>, then the power will be turned off.

What color is the power indicator in standby?

Orange or purple.

During operation of the “Power management” function, what color does the power indicator turn in the power off state?

Purple.

Why might the power indicator remain lit for a while after the power plug is disconnected?

After the power plug is disconnected, the power indicator may remain lit for a while. This is not a malfunction.

What happens to the display if the <Main power switch> is turned OFF ( ) or press the <Main Power On / Off button> ( ) on the unit while the unit is ON (picture is displayed) or OFF (standby state)?

The display turns off.

When does the power indicator not light up?

When [Power LED light-up setting] is set to [Off], the power indicator does not light up.

How do you select the language?

Select the language with and press <ENTER>.

How do you select Portrait setting for vertical installation?

For vertical installation, select [Portrait] with and press <ENTER>.

When won’t the screens for selecting language and portrait setting be displayed?

Once the items are set, the screens won’t be displayed when switching on the unit next time.

How can the language and portrait settings be reset?

Each item can be reset in the following menus. [OSD language] [Display orientation].

When can you not use the Web Control function and for communication control via a LAN (including Panasonic application software)?

If not set, could not use the Web Control function and for communication control via a LAN (including Panasonic application software).

Is reusing passwords recommended?

No.

Can the password be blank?

No.

What type of password is recommended?

A password consisting of at least eight half-width characters and contaning characters of at least three of the following four types is recommended.

What are the recommended character types for a password?

• Uppercase letters
• Lowercase letters
• Digits
• Symbols (~!@#$%^&*()_+|}{][<>.,/?`)

How do you enter the user name?

A keyboard for user name setting is displayed. Enter the user name.

How do you enter the password?

A keyboard for password setting is displayed. After the password is entered, select [Ok] to display a confirmation screen. Enter the password again and select [Ok] to determine the password.

What does selecting Save do?

The user name and password set above are saved in the display unit.

What does selecting Skip do?

Exits this screen without configuring this setting.

When will the screen for entering user name and password not be displayed?

Once set or skipped, this screen won’t be displayed when switching on the unit next time.

How can you configure the user name and password setting again?

Use the following menu to configure the setting again. [Network settings].

When might the message, “No activity power off Precautions ‘No activity power off’ is enabled.” be displayed?

The following message may be displayed when turning the unit power ON: No activity power off Precautions ‘No activity power off’ is enabled. When [No activity power off] in the [Setup] menu is set to [Enable], a warning message is displayed every time the power is turned ON.

When might the message, ““Power management” information Last turn off due to ’Power management’.” be displayed?

When “Power management” is functioned, an information message is displayed every time the power is turned ON.

When is the message, “COLOUR DESIGN Information Colour design settings are universal.” displayed?

The information is displayed when [Setup] – [Colour design settings] – [Colour design] is set to [Universal].

How can the message displays be set?

These message displays can be set with the following menu: * [Power on settings] menu Information(No activity power off) Information(Power management) Information(Colour design)

How do you select the signals input to the unit?

Press <INPUT> or <INPUT (Unit)>.

What happens every time the <INPUT> or <INPUT (Unit)> button is pressed?

Switches input every time the buttons are pressed.

What is the input switching order?

[HDMI1] → [HDMI2] → [HDMI3] → [USB-C] → [SLOT] → [PC] → [Screen Transfer] → [USB] or [Internal Memory] → [MEMORY VIEWER] → [WHITEBOARD]

What does [HDMI1] mean?

HDMI IN 1 terminal, HDMI input

What does [HDMI2] mean?

HDMI IN 2 terminal, HDMI input

What does [HDMI3] mean?

HDMI IN 3 terminal, HDMI input

What does [USB-C] mean?

USB-C HOST terminal, USB-C input

What does [SLOT] mean?

Input signal of the function board

*What does [PC]1 mean?

PC IN terminal, PC input

What does [Screen Transfer] mean?

Input that displays images transmitted via network using “Screen Transfer”, a dedicated application by Panasonic

*What does [USB]2 mean?

USB terminal, USB input

*What does [Internal Memory]2 mean?

Image input from the internal memory

What does [MEMORY VIEWER] mean?

USB terminal, “Memory viewer” input

What does [WHITEBOARD] mean?

The screen switches “WHITEBOARD” input.

Why might [PC] be displayed as [PC [YPBPR]]?

[PC] may be displayed as [PC [YPBPR]] depending on the settings of [PC input mode].

When is either [USB] or [Internal Memory] selected for input?

For [USB] and [Internal Memory] input, either one selected for the [Use memory select] setting is

Why might some inputs not be able to be selected?

Inputs set for [Input skip settings] or inputs when each function is disabled cannot be selected.

How is the signal name displayed?

Displays the signal name as set in [Input label].

When will input not be switched?

Input will not be switched unless [Input lock] is set to [Off].

How do you switch between the component (color difference) video and RGB for the PC IN terminal?

To switch between the component (color difference) video and RGB for the PC IN terminal, make the setting with [Setup] – [PC input mode].

What might occur on the LCD liquid crystal panel when a still picture is kept on the panel for an extended period?

Image retention may occur on the LCD liquid crystal panel when a still picture is kept on the panel for an extended period.

How can image retention be prevented?

To prevent such a problem, using the screensaver and the [Wobbling] function is recommended.

What happens when switching to another input while the unit is connected to Screen Transfer with Screen Transfer input?

Switching to another input while the unit is connected to Screen Transfer with Screen Transfer input will break the connection.

What should you do after switching the input when connected to Screen Transfer?

Check the connection again after switching the input.

When is the WHITEBOARD input enabled?

When [Whiteboard settings] – [Whiteboard] is set to [On], the WHITEBOARD input is enabled.

How can the setting status of input label, picture mode, etc. be checked?

Press <RECALL>.

What will be displayed when <RECALL> is pressed?

Current setting status will be displayed.

What does Input label mean?

HDMI1

What does Aspect mode mean?

Full

What does Backup input change mean?

AUDIO IN

What does Audio input mean?

Memory name: MEMORY2

What does Profile name mean?

Schedule play mode

What does [Schedule play mode] mean?

Off timer 90 min

What does Off timer remaining time mean?

Backup mode OK

What does Clock / Mute mean?

10:00

What is displayed when there is no video signal to the selected input?

When there is no video signal to the selected input, [No signal] is displayed for about 30 seconds at the end.

What is displayed when a USB memory is not connected to the USB terminal at the time of switching to the USB input?

When a USB memory is not connected to the USB terminal at the time of switching to the USB input, [No external media] is displayed for about 30 seconds.

What is displayed when a connected USB memory does not contain any playable file?

Even when a USB memory is connected, if it does not contain any playable file, [No play file] is displayed at all times.

When are the messages [No signal] / [No external media] / [No play file] not displayed?

When [No signal image settings] – [Display setting] is set to [On], the message [No signal] / [No external media] / [No play file] are not displayed. Instead, the image set in [No signal image settings] will be displayed.

How can the clock be displayed?

To display the clock, set [Date and time] and then set [Clock display] to [On].

How can the volume be adjusted?

Press <VOL +> <VOL -> or <+ (Unit)> <-(Unit)> to adjust volume.

What happens to the current sound volume level when the power is turned off?

The current sound volume level is memorised even if the power is turned off.

What happens when [Maximum VOL function] is set to [On]?

When [Maximum VOL function] is set to [On], the volume can only be adjusted to the maximum point you set, and the displayed value turns red when it reached its maximum.

What happens when [Initial VOL function] is set to [On]?

When [Initial VOL function] is set to [On], the volume will be at the set level when the display is turned on.

When is Sound mute On / Off useful?

It is useful when you want to mute the sound temporarily, for example, when answering the phone or door.

How do you mute the sound?

Press <MUTE>.

What appears on the screen when sound is muted?

appears on the screen and the sound is muted.

How do you reactivate the sound?

Press <MUTE> again to reactivate the sound.

When is the sound reactivated?

It is also reactivated when the power is turned on / off or the volume level is changed.

What is displayed as a reminder while MUTE is active?

While MUTE is active, is displayed as a reminder after operation.

When is not displayed after operation?

When the image set in [No signal image settings] is displayed, is not displayed after operation.

What is displayed as in [ENGLISH(US)] OSD language?

In [ENGLISH(US)] OSD language, is displayed as [MUTE].

What time periods can the display be preset to switch to stand-by?

The Display can be preset to switch to stand-by after a fixed period. (30 min, 60 min, 90 min)

How does the setting switch each time <OFF TIMER> is pressed?

The setting switches each time <OFF TIMER> is pressed. * [0 min] → [30 min] → [60 min] → [90 min] → [0 min] (Cancel)

What happens when 3 minutes remain on the timer?

When 3 minutes remain, the remaining time will flash (Red). After that, it switches to stand-by.

How can you see the Off timer remaining time?

To see the Off timer remaining time, press <RECALL>.

What happens to the off timer if a power interruption occurs?

The Off timer is cancelled if a power interruption occurs. When the power is turned on later on, it will be in stand-by condition.

What happens when the image set in [No signal image settings] is displayed?

When the image set in [No signal image settings] is displayed, remaining time is not displayed even when the timer expires in 3 minutes. Instead, the image is displayed until the power is turned off.

How do you check the remaining time when the image set in [No signal image settings] is displayed?

Press <RECALL> to check the remaining time.

How do you move through the aspect options?

Press <ASPECT> or <ENTER (Unit)> repeatedly to move through the aspect options.

What are the aspect options?

[Normal] → [Native] → [H fit] → [V fit] → [Zoom1] → [Zoom2] → [Full]

Can the aspect mode be changed when using Screen Transfer input?

No.

How is the aspect mode saved?

The aspect mode is memorised separately for each input terminal.

If the display is installed vertically, how are the enlargement directions for the [H fit] and [V fit] aspect modes?

Even if the display is installed vertically, the enlargement directions for the [H fit] and [V fit] aspect modes are the same as those in horizontal installation.

In what cases do the enlargement directions not change?

The enlargement directions do not change in the following cases as well. * When the unit is installed in the portrait setting by setting [Display orientation] to [Portrait].

• When [USB media player settings] – [Still picture rotation] is set to [Portrait].

How are the pictures displayed in Full aspect mode?

Pictures are displayed filling the screen.

How are the pictures displayed in Normal aspect mode?

Pictures are displayed with the aspect ratio of input signals.

How are the pictures displayed in Native aspect mode?

Pictures are displayed with the resolution of input signals.

How are the pictures displayed in H fit aspect mode?

Pictures are enlarged to the maximum horizontal dimension of the screen. Pictures of signals with the aspect ratio vertically longer than the aspect ratio of the screen are displayed with the top and bottom of the pictures cut.

How are the pictures displayed in V fit aspect mode?

Pictures are enlarged to the maximum vertical dimension of the screen. Pictures of signals with the aspect ratio horizontally longer than the aspect ratio of the screen are displayed with the right and left of the pictures cut.

How are the pictures displayed in Zoom1 aspect mode?

Letterbox pictures with a 16:9 aspect ratio are enlarged vertically to fill the screen. The top and bottom edges of the pictures are cut off.

How are the pictures displayed in Zoom2 aspect mode?

Letterbox pictures with a 16:9 aspect ratio are enlarged vertically and horizontally to fill the screen. The top and bottom edges as well as the left and right edges of the pictures are cut off.

What should be noted when selecting an aspect mode?

This display incorporates several types of aspect mode select functions. If a mode whose aspect ratio is different from that of TV program content is selected, the on-screen appearance will differ from that of the original images. Note this point when selecting an aspect mode.

What should be noted about putting the display in a public place for commercial purposes or a public showing and then using the aspect mode select function to shrink or expand the picture?

Be aware that if you put the display in a public place for commercial purposes or a public showing and then use the aspect mode select function to shrink or expand the picture, you may be violating the copyright under copyright law. It is prohibited to show or alter the copyrighted materials of other people for commercial purposes without the prior permission of the copyright holder.

What happens to a non-wide picture with a 4:3 aspect ratio by displaying in full screen using a zoom mode or the 16:9 mode?

When viewing a non-wide picture with a 4:3 aspect ratio by displaying in full screen using a zoom mode or the 16:9 mode, the circumference image will be partially invisible or deformed.

What aspect mode should be used to view original images with respect for creators’ intentions?

Original images can be viewed in the [Normal] mode with respect for creators’ intentions.

How many screen areas can be selected to zoom in with the digital zoom?

Select the screen areas (25 areas) to zoom in, and zoom in the selected image areas ×2, ×3 or ×4. (Operate using the remote control. The buttons on the unit cannot be used for some operations.)

How do you set the digital zoom mode?

Press <ZOOM>.

What happens to the screen when <ZOOM> is pressed?

The screen aspect is set to [Full], and the digital zoom operation guide is displayed.

How do you select the image areas to zoom in?

Select pressing .

How do you switch the zoom ratio for the screen areas?

Switches every time <ENTER> is pressed.

What are the zoom ratios?

×1 ×2 ×3 ×4 ×1 Exit ×2 Exit ×3 Exit ×4 Exit

What happens if no operation is performed for the period set for [Menu display duration] when the zoom ratio for the screen is “×1”?

If no operation is performed for the period set for [Menu display duration] (5 ‒ 180 seconds) when the zoom ratio for the screen is “×1”, the unit exits the zoom mode.

What happens if no operation is performed for approx. 3 seconds when the zoom ratio for the screen is “×2”, “×3” or “×4”?

If no operation is performed for approx. 3 seconds when the zoom ratio for the screen is “×2”, “×3” or “×4”, the digital zoom operation guide display disappears.

How do you display the digital zoom operation guide again when it has disappeared?

Pressing any of the buttons displays the guide again.

How do you exit the digital zoom mode?

Press <RETURN> to exit the mode. The screen returns to the previous state just before entering the digital zoom mode, and the digital zoom operation guide display disappears.

What buttons can be pressed to exit the digital zoom mode?

Press any of the following buttons to exit the mode. Then, the operation of the pressed button is performed. Remote Control: <AUTO SETUP> <POSITION> <PICTURE> <INPUT> <SETUP> <SOUND> <DEFAULT> <RECALL> <MUTE> <ASPECT> <OFF TIMER> <FUNCTION> <VOL +> <VOL -> <1> ‒ <6> Unit: <INPUT (Unit)> <MENU (Unit)> <+ (Unit)> <-(Unit)> <ENTER (Unit)>

What happens when the screen saver timer starts up?

When the screen saver timer starts up, the digital zoom mode finishes.

What happens when the power is turned OFF?

When the power is turned OFF, a force-quit is performed.

How can the power be turned off to cause a force-quit from the digital zoom mode?

• When the power is turned OFF by pressing the <Standby (ON/OFF) button>.
• When the display is turned OFF at the <Main Power On / Off button>
• When the power is turned OFF by the off-timer
• When the power is turned OFF by [No signal power off] or “Power management”.

In what cases is the digital zoom mode not available?

In the following cases, the digital zoom mode is not available. * When [Multi display settings] – [Multi screen display] is set to [On] * When [Portrait settings] – [Portrait display] is set to [On] * When the screen saver is in operation * When Screen Transfer / USB / MEMORY VIEWER / WHITEBOARD input is selected.

Is the zoomed image rougher than the original image?

Yes.

What functions should be used for multi display use?

For multi display use, use the functions in [Multi display settings].

How do you display the menu screen?

1. Press the <INPUT> button on the remote control several times. Each time you press the button, the menu screen will switch as follows: Normal Viewing → [Picture] → [Setup] → [Position] → [Sound].
2. Select the desired item on the screen by pressing the <+> or <-> button to highlight your selection and then press the <ENTER> button. For example, if you want to select the [Picture] menu, you would press the <+> or <-> button until the [Picture] menu is highlighted and then press <ENTER>.

How do you set the desired option once you are in a menu?

1. Press the <+> or <-> button to select your desired option within the menu.
2. Press the <ENTER> button to set your selection.

How do you exit from the menu?

Press the <MENU> button to exit from the menu. You can also press the <RETURN> button to return to the previous screen. Additionally, pressing the button you originally selected in step one will also exit from the menu.

What happens when changing the display, picture or sound settings?

When changing these settings, picture or sound disturbance may occur temporarily. This is not a malfunction.

What does it mean when a menu item is grayed out?

A menu that cannot be adjusted is grayed out. The menu that can be adjusted changes depending on the signal, input and menu setting.

How do you adjust the position of the picture?

1. Press the <POSITION> button to display the [Position] menu.
2. Select the item you want to adjust with the <+> or <-> buttons. Unadjustable items are grayed out. Adjustable items differ depending on the signal, input and the display mode.
3. Adjust with the <+> or <-> buttons.
4. Press the <POSITION> button to exit from adjust mode.

How do you reset the position settings to their defaults?

When [Default] is selected, pressing the <ENTER> button resets the adjustment values of all the displayed menus to default. When adjusting each item, pressing <DEFAULT> resets the adjustment value of that item to default.

When using the Screen Transfer or WHITEBOARD input, can the position be set?

No. When using Screen Transfer or WHITEBOARD input, [Position] cannot be set.

Are the settings for [Position] memorized?

Yes, the settings for [Position] are memorized separately for each input signal.

What is important to note about [Position] settings when the display is installed vertically?

Even if the display is installed vertically, the adjustment direction of the position and size does not change. When [Image rotation] is set to [180 degrees], the adjustment direction becomes opposite of that in the [Off] state.

When inputting a PC signal, are there any settings that are automatically corrected?

When inputting a PC signal, [H-position] / [V-position], [H-size] / [V-size], [Clock phase] and [Dot clock] are automatically corrected.

What condition enables these settings to be automatically corrected?

This setting is enabled when an analogue signal (PC) is input, [PC input mode] is set to [PC] and the aspect mode is set to [Full].

How do you activate auto setup?

While displaying the picture of the corresponding signal, select [Auto setup] and press <ENTER>. You can also use the remote control and press the <AUTO SETUP> button.

What happens if Auto Setup does not work?

When Auto Setup does not work, [Invalid] is displayed.

When will [Clock phase] and [Dot clock] not be automatically corrected?

When the dot clock frequency of a PC signal is 162 MHz or higher, [Clock phase] and [Dot clock] cannot be automatically corrected.

What may prevent Auto Setup from working?

Auto setup may not work when a cropped or dark image is input. In such case, switch to a bright image with borders and other objects are clearly shown, and then try auto setup again.

What should you do if there is misalignment after performing Auto Setup?

Depending on the signal, out of alignment may occur after Auto Setup. Carry out fine tuning for the position/size as required.

What should you do if Auto Setup cannot set properly for XGA signal (1024 x 768, 1280 x 768, 1366 x 768)?

If Auto Setup cannot set properly for XGA signal (1024 x 768, 1280 x 768, 1366 x 768), pre-selecting the individual signal in [XGA mode] may result in correct Auto Setup.

When is accurate auto setup not possible?

Accurate auto setup is not possible:

• When a signal such as additional information is superimposed out of valid image period.
• When intervals between synchronizing signal and image signal are short.
• When image signals with tri level synchronizing signal added are input.

When will automatic position adjustment start when [PC auto setting] is set to [On]?

Automatic position adjustment starts under the following conditions:

• When the display power is turned ON.
• When the input signal is switched.

What may appear outside the area the picture is displayed when [PC auto setting] is set to [On]?

In some cases, noise appears outside the area picture is displayed, but it is not a malfunction.

What is required for [Clock phase] and [Dot clock] to be enabled?

[Clock phase] and [Dot clock] are enabled only when [PC input mode] is set to [PC] in PC IN input.

What should you do if Auto Setup does not work well?

If Auto Setup does not work well, select [Default], press <ENTER>, and then adjust the position/size manually.

What do the following menu options do in the [Position] menu?

• [H-size]: Adjusts the horizontal size with the <+> or <-> buttons.
• [V-position]: Adjusts the vertical position with the <+> or <-> buttons.
• [V-size]: Adjusts the vertical size with the <+> or <-> buttons.
• [Clock phase] (For PC IN input): In some cases, frame of the screen appears blurred or smudged, when PC signal is input.
• [Dot clock] (For PC IN input): Periodic striped pattern interference (noise) may occur when a striped pattern is displayed. If this happens, adjust so that any such noise is minimized.

What does the [Over scan] setting in the [Position] menu do?

The [Over scan] setting turns image over scan On/Off.

When is [Over scan] enabled?

This is enabled when the screen mode is set to [Full], [Zoom1] or [Zoom2].

When is [Over scan] disabled?

The [Over scan] setting is disabled when using USB / MEMORY VIEWER input, multi screen display of the multi display or digital zoom.

What does the [PC auto setting] in the [Position] menu do?

[PC auto setting] sets the operational mode of the automatic position adjustment in the [Position] menu.

• [Off]: Automatic position adjustment starts when <AUTO SETUP> is pressed on the remote control or automatic position adjustment is executed from the [Position] menu.

• [On]: Other than remote control or menu operation, automatic position adjustment starts:

  • When the display power is turned ON.
  • When the input signal is switched.

How do you adjust the sound?

1. Press the <SOUND> button to display the [Sound] menu.
2. Select the item you want to adjust with the <+> or <-> buttons. Menu items that cannot be adjusted will be grayed out.
3. Adjust with the <+> or <-> buttons.
4. Press the <SOUND> button to exit from adjust mode.

How do you reset the sound settings to the default settings?

Press the <DEFAULT> button while the menu is displayed, or press the <ENTER> button when [Default] is selected. This will reset the adjustment values of all the displayed menus to default.

What are the sound output selection options and what do they do?

• [SPEAKERS]: Internal speakers output
• [AUDIO OUT]: AUDIO OUT terminal output

What happens when [AUDIO OUT] is selected in the [Sound] menu?

When [AUDIO OUT] is selected, the other menus are grayed out and cannot be selected. Additionally, the audio volume setting is memorized separately for each output.

What does [Balance] in the [Sound] menu do?

[Balance] adjusts the left and right volume.

What are the different sound modes and what do they do?

• [Normal]: Emits the original sound.
• [Dynamic]: Accentuates sharp sound.
• [Clear]: Attenuates human voice.

How are [Bass], [Treble] and [Surround] settings memorized?

[Bass], [Treble] and [Surround] settings are memorized separately for [Normal], [Dynamic] and [Clear] in [Sound mode].

What does the [Auto volume] setting do and what are the different options?

[Auto volume] adjusts the volume level automatically. The options to select from are [Off], [Min], [Mid], and [Max]. Select from among these according to the degree of imbalance of sound level. [Off] has the smallest effect and [Max] has the largest effect.

When is the [Auto volume] option available?

This menu is available when [Clear] is selected in [Sound mode].

What happens to the [Surround] setting when [Auto Volume] is activated?

When [Auto volume] is activated ([Max] / [Mid] / [Min]), [Surround] will be [Off].

When should you use the [Auto volume] function?

Use this function when the sound level is variable during TV conference, etc.

What may happen to the audio when listening to music with [Auto volume] activated?

When listening to music, the sound volume may become off-balance between vocals and instruments, which may create a feeling of strangeness or make it difficult to hear audio due to emphasized noise. In this case, lower the adjustment level (e.g., [Max] → [Min]), or set the function to [Off].

What does the [Installation] setting do and what are the available options?

[Installation] switches the audio to audio suitable to the installation environment.

• [Stand]: Audio suitable to pedestal installation
• [Wall mounted]: Audio with slightly reduced sound reflection suitable to wall-hanging installation

When is the [Installation] setting in the [Sound] menu available?

This menu is available when [SPEAKERS] is selected in [Output select].

What should you do when outputting audio to an ARC-compatible device?

When outputting audio to an ARC-compatible device, refer to “Using ARC function”.

How do you adjust the picture?

1. Press the <PICTURE> button to display the [Picture] menu.
2. Select the item to adjust with the <+> or <-> button. Unadjustable items are grayed out.
3. Adjust with the <+> or <-> buttons.
4. Press the <PICTURE> button to exit from adjust mode.

How do you reset the picture settings to default?

When [Default] is selected, pressing <ENTER> resets the adjustment values of all the displayed menus to default. When adjusting each item, pressing <DEFAULT> resets the adjustment value of the item to default.

When displaying still pictures with the USB/Internal Memory input (USB media player), using WHITEBOARD input or displaying the thumbnail screen or file list screen of the MEMORY VIEWER input (Memory viewer), which picture settings have an effect?

When doing any of the above actions, only the following settings have an effect on the picture: [Backlight], [Gamma], [Colour temperature], [Blue light reduction].

What do the different picture mode options do?

• [Vivid signage]: Suitable for signage applications featuring more vivid and sharper images in bright environments such as a shop.
• [Natural signage]: Suitable for signage applications such as merchandise exhibition, featuring natural tone images with colour reproduction emphasized under light.
• [Standard]: Faithfully reproduces original picture.
• [Surveillance]: Tone-focused pictures with brightness reduced suitable for input from a monitoring camera.
• [Graphic]: Suitable for PC input.
• [DICOM]: Pictures close to the grayscale standard DICOM Part14.

Are the picture mode settings memorized?

Yes, the settings are memorized separately for each input terminal.

What does “DICOM” stand for?

DICOM is the abbreviation for “Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine”, which is a standard for communications between medical imaging devices.

Can the displayed images be used for medical purposes?

Although “DICOM” is used as a picture mode name, this unit is not a medical device. Do not use displayed images for such purposes as diagnosis.

What does the [Backlight] setting do?

[Backlight] adjusts luminance of the back light from darker to brighter.

What does the [Contrast] setting do?

[Contrast] selects the proper brightness and density for the room from less to more.

What does the [Brightness] setting do?

[Brightness] adjusts for easier viewing of dark pictures from darker to brighter.

What does the [Colour] setting do?

[Colour] adjusts color saturation from less to more.

What does the [Hue] setting do?

[Hue] adjusts hue of skin color from reddish to greenish.

What does [Sharpness] in the [Picture] menu do?

[Sharpness] adjusts sharpness from less to more.

What does the [Enhance level] setting do?

[Enhance level] switches the effect range for sharpness.

• [High]: Large effect.
• [Low]: Small effect.

What does [Gamma] in the [Picture] menu do?

[Gamma] adjusts gamma. The options are: [2.0], [2.2], [2.4], [2.6], [DICOM]. [2.0] has a small tilt and [DICOM] has a large tilt.

When is the [Gamma] setting fixed to [DICOM] and not adjustable?

When [DICOM] is selected in [Picture mode], [Gamma] is fixed to [DICOM].

When can the [DICOM] setting not be selected for [Gamma]?

When the items other than [DICOM] are selected in [Picture mode], [DICOM] cannot be set for [Gamma].

What does the [Colour temperature] setting do and what are the different options?

[Colour temperature] adjusts the color tone. The available options are: [3200K], [4000K], [5000K], [6500K], [7500K], [9300K], [10700K], [Native], [User1], [User2].

How does the [Colour temperature] setting impact the colors displayed?

Emphasizes red when the numerical value of [Colour temperature] is small, and emphasizes blue when it is big.

What is the [Native] setting in [Colour temperature]?

[Native] is a colour tone of the panel element. When this is selected, [Gamma] is fixed to 2.2 or equivalent and it cannot be adjusted.

What [Colour temperature] options can be selected when [DICOM] is selected in [Picture mode]?

When [DICOM] is selected in [Picture mode], only [6500K] and [9300K] can be selected.

How many detailed [Colour temperature] setting options can be stored?

2 kinds of detailed [Colour temperature] settings ([User1] and [User2]) can be stored.

How do you store user settings for [Colour temperature]?

1. Press <ENTER> while setting [Colour temperature].
2. Select the user to memorize settings with the <+> or <-> button and press <ENTER>.
3. Select [Yes] with the <+> or <-> button and press <ENTER>.
4. Set each item on the detail settings screen.

What happens after you set each item on the detail settings screen?

The settings are saved for the user. When you return to [Picture] menu, the user you have set is selected for [Colour temperature].

What are the options in the detail settings screen for [Colour temperature] and what do they do?

• [R gain]: Adjusts the white balance for light red areas from 0 to 255.
• [G gain]: Adjusts the white balance for light green areas from 0 to 255.
• [B gain]: Adjusts the white balance for light blue areas from 0 to 255.
• [R bias]: Adjusts the white balance for dark red areas from -127 to 128.
• [G bias]: Adjusts the white balance for dark green areas from -127 to 128.
• [B bias]: Adjusts the white balance for dark blue areas from -127 to 128.

What does [Dynamic contrast] in the [Picture] menu do?

[Dynamic contrast] automatically adjusts the contrast of the picture by determining the changes in the use of colours for images that constantly change, such as motion pictures. The effect can range from no effect to a large effect.

What does the [Colour enhancement] setting do and what are the available options?

[Colour enhancement] displays images by emphasizing colours. The available options are: [Off], [Low], [Mid], [High]. [Off] represents the smallest effect and [High] represents the largest effect.

What does [Blue light reduction] do?

[Blue light reduction] reduces blue light on the picture. The options are [Off], [Low], [Mid], [High]. [Off] represents a low effect and [High] represents a high effect.

How does changing the [Blue light reduction] setting away from [Off] impact the displayed pictures?

When it is set to a setting other than [Off], pictures look yellowish.

What does [Refine enhancer] in the [Picture] menu do?

[Refine enhancer] enhances the sense of resolution by correcting fuzzy outlines of pictures resulted from resizing, etc. The available options are [Off], [Low], [Mid], and [High]. [Off] represents the smallest effect and [High] represents the largest effect.

What does [Gradation smoother] do?

[Gradation smoother] extracts and eliminates noise components from the input video signals, and then displays noiseless pictures. Options include [Off] and [On].

What are Picture Profiles?

Picture Profiles allow you to store up to 6 combinations of picture adjustment values (in the [Picture] menu) in the display memory as profiles and apply them as needed, for a convenient way to enjoy your preferred picture settings.

How do you save picture adjustment values as profiles?

1. Specify the picture quality in the [Picture] menu.

2. In the [Picture] menu, select [Memory save] with the <+> or <-> button and press <ENTER>.

3. Select a profile name for saving the picture adjustment values with the <+> or <-> button and press <ENTER>. A “*” will appear for a profile in which the picture adjustments have already been saved.

4. Select [Ok] with the <+> or <-> button and press <ENTER>.

5. Enter a profile name with the number buttons and/or letter buttons.

   • To cancel saving the profile, select [Cancel].
   • When finished entering the profile name, select [Ok] with the <+> or <-> button and press <ENTER>.

How do you load profiles?

1. In the [Picture] menu, select [Memory load] with the <+> or <-> button and press <ENTER>.
2. Select the profile to load with the <+> or <-> button and press <ENTER>.

How do you load a profile using the numeric buttons on the remote?

Each numeric button <1> ‒ <6> is allocated for loading [MEMORY1] to [MEMORY6].

1. Press any of <1> ‒ <6>.
2. Select [Ok] with the <+> or <-> button and press <ENTER>.

How do you edit picture profiles?

1. In the [Picture] menu, select [Memory edit] with the <+> or <-> button and press <ENTER>.

2. Select the profile to edit with the <+> or <-> button and press <ENTER>.

3. Enter the new profile name you would like to use.

4. Select [Ok] with the <+> or <-> button and press <ENTER>.

   • To cancel saving the profile name edit, select [Cancel].

What does [Colour management] in the [Picture] menu do?

[Colour management] lets you adjust the colours and tones for R (red), G (green), B (blue), complementary colours (cyan, magenta and yellow) and the intermediate colours on the screen individually.

• [Off]: Disables colour management function.
• [6-segment]: Enables 6-segment colour management function.
• [12-segment]: Enables 12-segment colour management function.

How do you set up the [Colour management] settings?

1. Set [Colour management] to [6-segment] or [12-segment], and then press <ENTER>.
2. Set each item on detail settings screen.

What are the different adjustable items on the [Colour management] detail settings screen and what do they do?

• [Select colour]: Select the colour to adjust with the <+> or <-> buttons.
• [Hue]: Adjusts colour balance from – 127 to + 127.
• [Saturation]: Adjusts gradations of colour from – 127 to + 127.
• [Value]: Adjusts brightness of colour from – 127 to + 127.
• [Reset]: Resets to defaults. Select [Yes] with the <+> or <-> button and press <ENTER>.

What is the difference between [6-segment] and [12-segment] colour management?

When [6-segment] is selected, R (red), G (green), B (blue) and complementary colours (cyan, magenta and yellow) are adjusted respectively. When [12-segment] is selected, [6-segment] items and the intermediate colours can be adjusted.

How do you delete profiles?

1. In the [Picture] menu, select [Memory edit] with and press <ENTER>.
2. Select [Memory delete] with and press <ENTER>.
3. Select the profile to delete with and press <ENTER>.
4. Select [Ok] with and press <ENTER>.

How do you delete all profiles?

To delete all profiles, select [All delete].

How do you rename profiles?

1. In the [Picture] menu, select [Memory edit] with and press <ENTER>.
2. Select [Memory name change] with and press <ENTER>.
3. Select the profile to rename with and press <ENTER>.
4. Enter a name for the profile with .
   • Entering characters (see page 165)
5. When you finished entering the profile name, select [Ok] with and press <ENTER>.
   • To cancel renaming the profile, select [Cancel].

How do you display the [Setup] menu?

Press <SETUP> to display the [Setup] menu.

How do you adjust the setup menu?

1. Select the item to set with .
   • Menu that cannot be adjusted is greyed out. Adjustable menu changes depending on signal input and menu setting.
2. Set with .
3. Press <SETUP> to exit from adjust mode.

How do you return to the previous screen?

Press <RETURN>.

What are the examples of [Signal] submenu screen When HDMI is selected?

• 60.00 Hz 74.18 MHz 1080/60i 33.72 kHz
• Signal Cinema reality YUV/RGB-in select Noise reduction Signal range MPEG noise reduction Dynamic backlight control Off YUV Auto Full(0-255) Off Off HDCP status EDID select 4K/60p/HDR Colour gamut Auto Dynamic range Auto None

What are the examples of [Signal] submenu screen When USB-C is selected?

• 無し 59.95 Hz 154.00 MHz 1920×1200/60 74.04 kHz
• Signal Cinema reality YUV/RGB-in select Noise reduction Signal range MPEG noise reduction Dynamic backlight control Off YUV Auto Full(0-255) Off Off HDCP status EDID select 4K/60p None

What are the examples of [Signal] submenu screen When SLOT is selected?

• 60.00 Hz 74.18 MHz 1080/60i 33.72 kHz
• Signal Cinema reality YUV/RGB-in select Noise reduction Signal range MPEG noise reduction Dynamic backlight control Off YUV Auto Full(0-255) Off Off HDCP status None

What are the examples of [Signal] submenu screen When PC is selected?

• 59.95 Hz 154.00 MHz 1920×1200/60 74.04 kHz 0
• Signal Cinema reality XGA mode V-freq. H-freq. Dot clock freq. Input level Signal format Off Auto MPEG noise reduction Noise reduction Off Auto Dynamic backlight control Off

What are the examples of [Signal] submenu screen When [YP BP R] is selected?

• 60.00 Hz 74.18 MHz 1080/60i 33.72 kHz 0
• Signal Cinema reality V-freq. H-freq. Dot clock freq. Input levelSignal format Off MPEG noise reduction Noise reduction Off Auto Dynamic backlight control Off

What are the examples of [Signal] submenu screen When Screen Transfer / USB/Internal Memory / MEMORY VIEWER / WHITEBOARD is selected?

• Signal Noise reduction MPEG noise reduction Auto Off

What are some notes for the [Signal] submenu screen?

• [Signal] setup menu displays a different setting condition for each input signal.
• Menu that cannot be adjusted is greyed out.

What does the [YUV/RGB -in select] menu do?

This menu is displayed at HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2, HDMI IN 3, USB-C and SLOT inputs. Select to match the signals from the source connected to each terminal.

What are the options for [YUV/RGB -in select]?

• [YUV]: YUV signals
• [RGB]: RGB signals

What is a note about [YUV/RGB -in select]?

Set for each input terminal.

What does [Cinema reality] do?

Faithfully reproduces videos shot with cinema films. Set this to [Off] normally.

What is a note about [Cinema reality]?

• If [Cinema reality] is set to [On], videos including movies shot at 24 frames per second are reproduced more naturally.
• If the video is unnatural with [On] set, set it to [Off].

What does [Noise reduction] do?

Reduces picture noise.

What are the options for [Noise reduction]?

• [Off]: Disables [Noise reduction].
• [Min], [Mid], [Max]: Sets strength of [Noise reduction].
• [Auto]: [Noise reduction] will be automatically selected from [Min], [Mid] or [Max].

What does [MPEG noise reduction] do?

Reduces block noise and mosquito noise on MPEG videos.

What are the options for [MPEG noise reduction]?

• [Off]: Disables [MPEG noise reduction].
• [Min], [Mid], [Max]: Sets strength of [MPEG noise reduction].

What does [XGA mode] do?

This menu is displayed with PC IN input and when [PC input mode] is set to [PC]. This unit supports XGA signals (1024 x 768, 1280 x 768, 1366 x 768) having different aspect ratios and sampling rates.

What are the options for [XGA mode]?

• [Auto]: Automatically detects the signal. Switch the setting to suit the input signal for better display depends on the angle of view or display resolution condition.

What is a note about [XGA mode]?

After making this setting, be sure to make each adjustment (such as [Auto setup]) on the [Position] menu as necessary.

What does [Signal range] do?

This menu is displayed at HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2, HDMI IN 3, USB-C and SLOT inputs. Switches the dynamic range to match the signals from the source connected to each terminal.

What are the options for [Signal range]?

• [Video(16-235)]: If the input signal is the video range Example: HDMI terminal output for Blu-ray disc player
• [Full(0-255)]: If the input signal is full range Example: HDMI terminal output for personal computer
• [Auto]: Switches the dynamic range automatically between [Video(16-235)] and [Full(0-255)] according to the input signal.

What does [Input level] do?

This menu is displayed at PC IN input. Adjustment of parts which are extremely bright and hard to see.

What are the options for [Input level]?

-16 to +16: (Level low ) ‒ (Level high)

What does [Dynamic backlight control] do?

Improves picture contrast and alleviates whiteness by controlling the back light when signals with the low average brightness level (APL) are input.

What are the options for [Dynamic backlight control]?

• [On]: Enables [Dynamic backlight control].
• [Off]: Disables [Dynamic backlight control].

What are some notes for the [Dynamic backlight control] menu?

• The screen may become dark if menu operation or input signal switching is performed while the on-screen menu is being displayed with this function set to [On]. Hiding the on-screen menu will restore the screen to the appropriate brightness.
• If the [Dynamic backlight control] setting is different for each input, the screen brightness may change by switching input.
• Depending on the displayed image, the screen may flicker. If this annoys you, set [Dynamic backlight control] to [Off].

What does [EDID select] do?

This menu is displayed in HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2, HDMI IN 3 and USB-C inputs. EDID data of each terminal is switched.

What are the options for [EDID select]?

• [4K/60p/SDR]: Sets EDID compatible with 4K video signals (Max. 4096 x 2160 dots, Max. vertical operation frequency 60 Hz). This EDID supports SDR (Standard Dynamic Range). HDR (High Dynamic Range) is not supported.
• [4K/60p/HDR]: Sets EDID compatible with 4K video signals (Max. 4096 x 2160 dots, Max. vertical operation frequency 60 Hz). This EDID supports HDR (High Dynamic Range).
• [4K/60p]: Sets EDID compatible with 4K video signals (Max. 4096 x 2160 dots, Max. vertical operation frequency 60 Hz).
• [4K/30p]: Sets EDID compatible with 4K video signals (Max. 4096 x 2160 dots, Max. vertical operation frequency 30 Hz).
• [2K]: Sets EDID compatible with 2K video signals (Max. 1920 x 1200 dots).

What are some notes for the [EDID select] menu?

• For HDMI IN input, [4K/60p/SDR], [4K/60p/HDR], [4K/30p] and [2K] are selectable. For USB-C input, [4K/60p], [4K/30p] and [2K] are selectable.
• If [4K/60p/SDR] or [4K/60p/HDR] is selected and pictures are not displayed correctly during 4K video signal input, switch the setting to [4K/30p].
• If [4K/60p/SDR], [4K/60p/HDR] or [4K/30p] is selected and pictures are not displayed correctly during 2K or lower video signal input, switch the setting to [2K].
• For details of signals written in EDID of [4K/60p/SDR], [4K/60p/HDR], [4K/30p] and [2K], see “Preset Signals”

What does [Dynamic range] do?

This menu is displayed in HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 and HDMI IN 3 inputs. Switches the dynamic range.

What are the options for [Dynamic range]?

• [Auto]: Sets automatically according to the AVIInfoFrame information.
• [HDR (PQ)] Sets the dynamic range in compatible with HDR (PQ (Perceptual Quantization)).
• [HDR (HLG)]: Sets the dynamic range in compatible with HDR (HLG (Hybrid Log Gamma)).
• [SDR]: Sets the dynamic range in compatible with SDR.

What does [Colour gamut] do?

This menu is displayed in HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 and HDMI IN 3 inputs. Switches the colour gamut.

What are the options for [Colour gamut]?

• [Auto]: Sets the colour gamut automatically according to the ITU-2020 emu. information of AVIInfoFrame.
• [Native]: Displays with the colour space unique to this unit.
• [ITU-2020 emu.]: Displays with the colour space close to the ITU-R BT 2020 standard.

What does input signal display do?

Displays the frequency and the type of the current input signal.

What are the examples of the input signal display?

• 60.00 Hz 74.18 MHz 1080/60i 33.72 kHz
• H-freq. V-freq. Dot clock freq. Signal format HDCP status None
• Display range: Horizontal ( 15 kHz ‒ 135 kHz) Vertical ( 24 Hz ‒ 120 Hz)

What are some notes for the input signal display?

• The dot clock frequency is displayed when Digital and PC signal are input.
• The HDCP status information is displayed when digital signals are input.

What does [Power on settings] do?

Makes various settings at power-on.

What does [Initial input] do?

Sets the input at power-on.

What are the options for [Initial input]?

[Off] / [HDMI1] / [HDMI2] / [HDMI3] / [USB-C] / [SLOT] / [PC] / [PC [YPBPR]] / [Screen Transfer] / [USB/Internal Memory] / [MEMORY VIEWER] / [WHITEBOARD]

What is a note for [Initial input]?

When [Input lock] is set to the item other than [Off], this menu will be greyed out and cannot be set.

What does [Initial startup] do?

Sets the power status of the main unit when the power plug is inserted/extracted, or when the power is restored from instantaneous interruption due to blackout, etc.

What are the options for [Initial startup]?

• [Last memory]: Restored to the state before the power is turned off.
• [On]: Restored to the power-on state. (power indicator: blue)
• [Standby]: Restored to the standby state. (power indicator: orange / purple)

What is a note for [Initial startup]?

When multiple units are installed, it is recommended to select [Standby] to reduce the load when the power is restored.

What does [Initial VOL function] do?

Enables/Disables the volume setting function at power-on.

What are the options for [Initial VOL function]?

• [Off]: Volume before power-off
• [On]: Volume set for [Initial VOL level]

What does [Initial VOL level] do?

Sets the sound volume when [Initial VOL function] is enabled.

What is a note for [Initial VOL level]?

• The sound is output with the set volume when [Initial volume cannot be set to the level higher than the level set for [Maximum VOL level].

What does [Power ON screen delay] do?

When multiple displays are installed and are turned on simultaneously, this function distributes the load of power by delaying the power supply timing of each display. Setting is required for each display.

What are the options for [Power ON screen delay]?

• [Off]: The powers are supplied at the same time as power-on.
• [Auto]: The delay time is automatically set according to the numbers set for display IDs. The delay time is determined by multiplying a display ID by 0.3 seconds. Example: If the display ID is 3, the delay time is 0.9 seconds.
• 1 – 30: Sets the delay time (sec.). The powers are supplied to the display with the set time of delay after power-on.

What are some notes for [Power ON screen delay]?

• The power indicators blink blue from start to end of the delay operation process.
• This function also works when the power plug is inserted/extracted, or when the power is restored from instantaneous interruption due to blackout, etc.

What does [Information(No activity power off)] do?

Sets the display/non-display of the no-activity-auto-power-off warning message when the power is turned on.

What are the options for [Information(No activity power off)]?

• [On]: The warning message is displayed when the power is turned on.
• [Off]: The warning message is not displayed when the power is turned on.

What is a note for [Information(No activity power off)]?

This setting is enabled when [No activity power off] is [Enable].

What does [Information(Power management)] do?

Sets the display/non-display of a message that tells the power has been turned off by the power management function when the power is turned on.

What are the options for [Information(Power management)]?

• [On]: The message is displayed when the power is turned on.
• [Off]: The message is not displayed when the power is turned on.

What is a note for [Information(Power management)]?

This setting is enabled when “Power management” function is [On].

What does [Information(Colour design)] do?

Sets the display/non-display of the message notifying [Colour design settings] is set to [Universal] when the power is turned on.

What are the options for [Information(Colour design)]?

• [On]: The message is displayed when the power is turned on.
• [Off]: The message is not displayed when the power is turned on.

What is a note for [Information(Colour design)]?

This setting is enabled when [Colour design] is set to [Universal].

What does [Quick start] do?

This function quickly turns the power on at power-on.

What are the options for [Quick start]?

• [On]: Quickly turns the power on at power-on.
• [Off]: Turns the power on in a usual manner at power-on.

What is a note for [Quick start]?

When this function is set to [On], power consumption is increased in standby mode.

What does input search do?

When a signal is not detected, another input with a signal is automatically selected.

What are some notes for Input Search?

• MEMORY VIEWER / Screen Transfer / WHITEBOARD input is excluded from this function.
• When set to the USB input, the unit determines no signal is present if the USB memory is not connected to the USB terminal. In addition, even when a USB memory is connected, if there is no playable file, the unit determines no signal is present.
• This menu will be greyed out and cannot be set under the following conditions.
  • [Failover/Failback] is set to the item other than [Off].
  • [Power management mode] is set to [Input detection].
  • [Input lock] is not set to [Off].
  • When [Setup] – [Image settings] – [No signal image settings] – [Display setting] is set to [On].
  • [SLOT power link] is set to [On].
• If the input is changed by this function, the last input is selected when the power is turned on next time. If you wish to retain the original input when the power is turned on, set [Initial input] to the original input.

What does [Input search] do?

• [Off]: When there is no signal, the input is not switched automatically.
• [All inputs]: Searches all inputs and switches to an input with a signal. Input search is executed in the following order. Example: When the current input is HDMI1 [HDMI2] → [HDMI3] → [USB-C] → [SLOT] → [PC] → [USB] (or [Internal Memory]) → [HDMI1] →
  • The inputs set to [On] in [Input skip settings] are skipped when searching.
• [Custom]: Repeatedly searches [Current input], [1st search input] and [2nd search input] in order, and switches to an input with a signal.
• [Input detection]: Monitors the inputs set to [On], detect the status change from no signal to signal present, and switches to the input.
• [Searching…] is displayed during the input search.

What does [Input search]: [Custom] [1st search input], [2nd search input] do?

Set the input to search when [Custom] is selected.

What are the options for [Input search]: [Custom] [1st search input], [2nd search input]?

[HDMI1] / [HDMI2] / [HDMI3] / [USB-C] / [SLOT] / [PC] / [PC[YPBPR]] / [USB/Internal Memory] / [(None)]

What does [Input search]: [Input detection] do?

Sets the input to monitor during [Input detection].

What are the options for [Input search]: [Input detection]?

[HDMI1] / [HDMI2] / [HDMI3] / [USB-C] / [SLOT] / [PC]

• [Off]: The input is not monitored.
• [On]: The input is monitored.

What does [Changing delay] do?

Sets the delay time until the input is switched during [Input detection].

What are the options for [Changing delay]?

• [Off]: Switches the input if a signal is interrupted even for a very short period.
• 1 ‒ 10: Sets the delay time (sec.). Switches the input when the set time has elapsed after detecting no signal is present. However, if the detection period during which no signal is present is shorter than the set delay time, the input is not switched.

What are some notes for [Changing delay]?

• [Input detection] is the function that automatically switches the input as below by monitoring the presence of signal for the set input. • If a video signal is input to the set input that is not displayed (When the status has changed from signal absent to signal present.), the input is selected and switched. • If no signal is detected for the displayed input, the setting switches to the set input to which a signal is input. Also, if no signal is present for the displayed input when the power is turned on or when the input is switched, the setting switches to the set input to which a signal is input. When signals are input to multiple set inputs, the priority order as default (immediately after power-on) is as follows: HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, USB-C, PC. In the other case (When the input is switched after power-on), the input displayed last takes priority.
• [Changing delay] is the function to prevent the accidental input switch during a short period, such as when the signal is interrupted due to the frequency change for the input signal while [Input detection] is operating. If a signal is detected again within the set period (sec.), the input is not switched.
• [Input detection] may not operate correctly depending on the image playback device.
• [PC] operates only when [PC input mode] is set to [PC].
• [USB-C] and [SLOT] do not operate even if they are selected simultaneously.

What does Failover/Failback do?

Automatically switches to the backup input if an interruption of video occurs.

What are some notes for Failover/Failback?

• [PC] operates only when [PC input mode] is set to [PC].
• [SLOT] is enabled when the DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board is attached.
• MEMORY VIEWER / Screen Transfer / WHITEBOARD input is excluded from this function.
• Depending on the image playback device or image signal, a noise may occur on the screen, or this function may not operate.

How do you set the input change mode?

1. Go to [Input change mode].
2. Choose from the following options:
   • [Off]: Disables the Backup Input function.
   • [On]: Switches to the backup input if an interruption of video occurs. The backup video signal does not need to be in the same format as the (main) input in use for viewing. Upon switching to the backup input, the video and audio adjustment values for the backup input will be used.
   • [#]: Switches to the backup input if an interruption of video occurs.

What is a note for [On] Input Change Mode?

This function will start operating once a video signal is detected by both the input in use for viewing and the backup input and the [Backup input change] item is displayed as [Active].

What does [Primary backup input] do?

Sets the first priority backup input.

What are the options for [Primary backup input]?

(None) / [HDMI1] / [HDMI2] / [HDMI3] / [USB-C] / [SLOT] / [PC] / [USB/Internal Memory] The input that is of the same type as the one in use for viewing will be greyed out.

What does [Secondary backup input] do?

Sets the second priority backup input.

What are the options for [Secondary backup input]?

(None) / [HDMI1] / [HDMI2] / [HDMI3] / [USB-C] / [SLOT] / [PC] / [USB/Internal Memory] The input that is of the same type as the one in use for viewing will be greyed out.

What does [Auto switch back mode] do?

Sets whether or not to automatically return to the former (main) input when the former input video initially viewed is restored while viewing the video of the backup input enabled by the operation of the Backup Input function.

What are the options for [Auto switch back mode]?

• [Disable]: Unreturned
• [Enable]: Returned

What does [Backup input change] do?

Displays whether or not operating conditions for the Backup Input function are met.

What are the options for [Backup input change]?

• [Inactive]: Indicates that the conditions are not met, and inactivates the Backup Input function.
• [Active]: Indicates that the conditions are met, and activates the Backup Input function.

What does [Main input] do?

Displays the (main) input set by switching input.

What does [Current input] do?

Displays whether the input currently in use for viewing is the (main) input set by switching input or the backup one.

What are the setting conditions?

The following table describes restrictions (available combinations) on each setting item.

HDMI1	HDMI2	HDMI3	USB-C	SLOT	PC	USB/ Internal Memory
Backup	Backup	Backup	Backup	Backup	Backup	Backup
HDMI1	HDMI2	HDMI3	USB-C	SLOT	PC	USB/Internal Memory
*	*	○	○	*	×	○
PC	×	USB/Internal Memory	○	○	×
USB/Internal Memory	○	○	×

What do the symbols in the setting conditions table mean?

• *: Can be selected for both primary and secondary backup
• : Selectable for either Primary or Secondary.
• ×: Cannot be selected for either primary or secondary backup
• *: [USB-C] and [SLOT] do not operate even if they are selected simultaneously.

What is a note about setting conditions?

• If the same input is selected for primary and secondary, the secondary backup input is disabled. If the same input as the main input is selected for primary and secondary, those inputs are disabled.

What does pressing <RECALL> display?

Pressing <RECALL> displays any of the followings. * When the main input is being used for viewing and the operating conditions for the Backup Input function are met.

• HDMI1 Full Backup mode OK
• When the backup input, enabled by the operation of the Backup Input function, is being used for viewing.
  • HDMI1 Full Primary backup input
• When the conditions for the Backup Input function are met, the following screen is displayed.
  • Backup mode OK

What are some notes for Recall Display?

• This menu will be greyed out and cannot be set under the following conditions.
  • [Input search] is set to the item other than [Off].
  • [Setup] – [Image settings] – [No signal image settings] – [Display setting] is set to [On].
  • L, L, detection].
  • [SLOT power link] is set to [On].
• When set to the USB input, the unit determines video signals are interrupted by judging the USB memory is not connected to the USB terminal.
• This function may not operate correctly depending on the image playback device.

What does the screensaver do?

Alleviates the occurrence of afterimage when displaying still images or images with 4:3 aspect ratio for a long time.

What are screensaver settings?

When the Screensaver is operating, the following 5 patterns are displayed full screen for 5 seconds each, and it will be repeated. Black → Dark grey → Grey → Light grey → White → Light grey → Grey → Dark grey

How do you start the screensaver now?

1. Select [On] in [Mode].
2. Select [Start] and press <ENTER>.
   • The Screensaver will be activated.

What are some notes about starting the screensaver now?

• If the following buttons are pressed while the screen saver is operating, the screen saver is cancelled.
  • Remote control: <RETURN>
  • Unit: <MENU (Unit)> <INPUT (Unit)> <+ (Unit)> <- (Unit)> <ENTER (Unit)>
• When the display is turned off, the Screensaver will be deactivated.

How do you set the start and finish time of the screensaver?

1. Select [Time designation] in [Mode].
2. Set [Start time] and [Finish time].
   • Press once to change the time by 1 minute. Keep pressing down to change the time by 15 minutes.

What is a note about setting the start and finish time of the screensaver?

When the current time is displayed as [- -], set [Date and time] before setting [Start time] and [Finish time].

How do you start the screensaver and standby after?

1. Select [Standby after SCR saver] in [Mode].
2. Set [Screensaver duration].
   • Press once to change the time by 1 minute. Keep pressing down to change the time by 15 minutes.
3. Select [Start] and press <ENTER>.
   • Screensaver will be activated and the power will be turned off (standby) at the time set.

What is a note for the standby after screensaver setting?

[Screensaver duration] can be set from 0:00 to 23:59. When this is set to [0:00], [Standby after SCR saver] will not be activated.

What does [Wobbling] do?

Automatically shifts the display image to prevent image retention on the liquid crystal panel. Setting this to [On] moves the screen position at certain intervals and displays the images.

What are some notes about [Wobbling]?

• When [Multi display settings] – [Multi screen display] is set to [On], [Wobbling] will not be activated.
• When [Portrait settings] – [Portrait display] is set to [On], [Wobbling] will not be activated.
• When this function is operating, part of the screen may appear to be missing.

What does [Input label] do?

This function can change the label of the Input signal to be displayed.

What are the options for [Input label]?

• [HDMI1] [HDMI1] / [Blu-ray] / [CATV] / [STB] / [PressIT] / [HDVC] / [User]
• [HDMI2] [HDMI2] / [Blu-ray] / [CATV] / [STB] / [PressIT] / [HDVC] / [User]
• [HDMI3] [HDMI3] / [Blu-ray] / [CATV] / [STB] / [PressIT] / [HDVC] / [User]
• [USB-C] [USB-C] / [Blu-ray] / [CATV] / [STB] / [PressIT] / [HDVC] / [User]
• [SLOT] [SLOT] / [PressIT] / [User]
• [PC] [PC] / [Blu-ray] / [CATV] / [STB] / [PressIT] / [HDVC] / [User]
• [PC[YPBPR]] [PC[YPBPR]] / [Blu-ray] / [CATV] / [STB] / [PressIT] / [HDVC] / [User]

How do you set the user setting for [Input label]?

1. Press to select the input.
2. Press to select [User] and press <ENTER>.
3. Press to enter the label of the input signal to be displayed.
   • Entering characters (see page 165).

How do you set periodic time for screensaver operation?

1. Select [Interval] in [Mode].
2. Set [Periodic time].
   • Press to change the time by 15 minutes.

How do you set the operating time for screensaver operation?

1. Select [Interval] in [Mode].
2. Set [Operating time].
   • Press once to change the time by 1 minute. Keep pressing down to change the time by 15 minutes.

What is a note for the setting of screensaver operating and periodic times?

It is not possible to set the duration of [Operating time] longer than that of [Periodic time].

For all inputs, this function sets whether to skip those inputs when <INPUT> is pressed. What is the submenu screen?

[Input skip settings] – submenu screen.

What happens when [Off] is selected?

Pressing <INPUT> switches to the corresponding input, and the input is selected.

What happens when [On] is selected?

Pressing <INPUT> skips the corresponding input (not selectable).

What does the Power Management Settings do?

Set each item to reduce power consumption. This function works only for the input terminal that is currently selected.

What is the submenu screen?

[Power management settings] – submenu screen

When setting [Power management mode], what should be noted?

Set the “Power management” function to [On] for terminals to operate this function.

What happens when [Power management mode]: [On] is selected?

The following fixed values are set to the menu of power consumption reduction. Individual setting is not available.

• [No signal power off]: [Enable]
• [HDMI1 power management]: [On]
• [HDMI2 power management]: [On]
• [HDMI3 power management]: [On]
• [USB-C power management]: [On]
• [SLOT power management]: [On]
• [PC power management]: [On]

When is the menu of the power consumption reduction individually set?

This setting is enabled when [Power management mode] is set to [Custom].

What happens when [Power management mode]: [Input detection] is selected?

Sets the power consumption reduction menu individually. This is enabled when [Power management mode] is set to [Input detection]. This mode interlocks between the power management operation and the input detection function for operation. When this mode detects the change from without-signal state to with-signal state by monitoring input signals, the input signal detection function operates, and an input is automatically switched to the input. Also, if the current input signal disappears, it is automatically switched to another input. If all the input signals disappear, the power management function operates, and automatically turns the power off/on. This operation is performed between selected terminals.

What should be noted when selecting [No signal power off]?

• [Extended standby mode] is set to [Mode 2], and greyed out.

What happens when [No signal power off] is set to [Enable]?

The power supply of the unit goes off automatically (standby) when there is no operation or sync signal for about 10 minutes.

What should be noted about the [No signal power off] function?

• When set to the USB input, the unit determines no signal is present if the USB memory is not connected to the USB terminal, or the connected USB memory does not contain any playable file.
• With Screen Transfer input, the unit determines no signal is present in standby status and when the PC is not connected to Screen Transfer.
• This function operates regardless of the [On] / [Off] settings of [No signal image settings].
• This function may not operate depending on the video output devices.

What happens when [HDMI1 power management] is set to [On]?

It operates under the following conditions to turn the power on or off automatically.

What are the conditions to turn the power on or off automatically when [HDMI1 power management] is set to [On]?

• When no pictures (sync signal) are detected for 60 seconds or so at HDMI1 input: Power is turned off (standby); the power indicator lights up purple.
• When pictures (sync signal) are subsequently detected at HDMI1 input: Power is turned on; the power indicator lights up blue.

What should be noted about the [HDMI1 power management] function?

This function may not operate depending on the video output devices.

What happens when [HDMI2 power management] is set to [On]?

It operates under the following conditions to turn the power on or off automatically.

What are the conditions to turn the power on or off automatically when [HDMI2 power management] is set to [On]?

• When no pictures (sync signal) are detected for 60 seconds or so at HDMI2 input: Power is turned off (standby); the power indicator lights up purple.
• When pictures (sync signal) are subsequently detected at HDMI2 input: Power is turned on; the power indicator lights up blue.

What should be noted about the [HDMI2 power management] function?

This function may not operate depending on the video output devices.

What happens when [HDMI3 power management] is set to [On]?

It operates under the following conditions to turn the power on or off automatically.

What are the conditions to turn the power on or off automatically when [HDMI3 power management] is set to [On]?

• When no pictures (sync signal) are detected for 60 seconds or so at HDMI3 input: Power is turned off (standby); the power indicator lights up purple.
• When pictures (sync signal) are subsequently detected at HDMI3 input: Power is turned on; the power indicator lights up blue.

What should be noted about the [HDMI3 power management] function?

This function may not operate depending on the video output devices.

What happens when [USB-C power management] is set to [On]?

It operates under the following conditions to turn the power on or off automatically.

What are the conditions to turn the power on or off automatically when [USB-C power management] is set to [On]?

• When no pictures (sync signal) are detected for 60 seconds or so at USB-C input: Power is turned off (standby); the power indicator lights up purple.
• When pictures (sync signal) are subsequently detected at USB-C input: Power is turned on; the power indicator lights up blue.

What should be noted about the [USB-C power management] function?

• This function may not operate depending on the video output devices.
• When this function is set to [On], set [Quick start] to [On] to enable the operation.
• When [Quick start] is set to [Off], if images are not detected, the unit enters the standby state even if it is set to [On]. However, the unit does not start up even if images are detected again. To operate the power management function, it is necessary to set both [Quick start] and [USB-C power management] to [On] respectively.

What happens when [SLOT power management] is set to [On]?

It operates under the following conditions to turn the power on or off automatically.

What are the conditions to turn the power on or off automatically when [SLOT power management] is set to [On]?

• When no pictures (sync signal) are detected for 60 seconds or so at SLOT input: Power is turned off (standby); the power indicator lights up purple.
• When pictures (sync signal) are subsequently detected at SLOT input: Power is turned on; the power indicator lights up blue.

What should be noted about the [SLOT power management] function?

• This function may not operate depending on the video output devices.
• This function is enabled only when the DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board is attached to the expansion slot (SLOT).

What is the [PC power management] function?

(DPMS function)

What happens when the [PC power management] (DPMS function) is set to [On]?

It operates under the following conditions to turn the power on or off automatically.

What are the conditions to turn the power on or off automatically when [PC power management] is set to [On]?

• When no pictures (sync signal) are detected for 60 seconds or so at PC input: Power is turned off (standby); the power indicator lights up purple.
• When pictures (sync signal) are subsequently detected at PC input: Power is turned on; the power indicator lights up blue.

What should be noted about the [PC power management] function?

• This function is effective when [PC input mode] is [PC].
• This function may not operate depending on the video output devices.

What does the [Power save] function do?

This function adjusts the brightness of the backlight to reduce power consumption.

What are the settings for [Power Save]?

• [Off]: The power save function does not operate.
• [On]: Backlight brightness is reduced.

What does the [Extended standby mode] function do?

Sets the operation in standby mode by the “Power management” function for the input terminal for which the “Power management” function is set to [On].

What does [Mode 1] do?

• If a video signal (synchronized signal) is detected at the input terminal with which the standby mode is entered, the power is turned “ON” with the input.
• If a video signal (synchronized signal) is detected at any of the input terminals for which the “Power management” function is set to [On], the power is turned “ON”, and the input is switched to the detected input.

What does [Mode 3] do?

Even when the power is turned off using the remote control, if a video signal (synchronized signal) is newly detected at any of the input terminals for which the “Power management” function is set to [On], the power is turned “ON”, and the input is switched to the detected input. This function does not operate if the power plug is removed from the outlet. Turn the power “ON” once to use this function.

What should be noted about the [Extended standby mode] function?

• When [Input search] is [All inputs] or [Custom], the [Input search] function is prioritised. (The “Power management” function does not operate for each terminal.)
• When [Failover/Failback] – [Input change mode] is set to items other than [Off], the [Failover/Failback] function is prioritised. (The “Power management” function does not operate for each terminal.)

What does the [Changing delay] function do?

Sets the delay time until the input is switched when [Power management mode] is [Input detection].

What are the settings for [Changing Delay]?

• [Off]: Switches the input if a signal is interrupted even for a very short period.
• 1 to 10: Sets the delay time (sec.). Switches the input when the set time has elapsed after detecting no signal is present. However, if the detection period during which no signal is present is shorter than the set delay time, the input is not switched.

What should be noted about the [Changing delay] function?

The operation when [Input detection] is selected is the same as the operation when [Input search] is set to [Input detection].

What does the [Audio input select] function do?

Sets the audio input for each video input.

What is the submenu screen?

[Audio input select] – submenu screen.

What is “No audio”?

No audio input (Mute)

How is the audio input displayed when the setting for the audio input has been changed from the factory settings?

HDMI1 Full AUDIO IN

What does [Device information] do?

Sets whether to display or hide the information of the device connected to the HDMI terminal or SLOT terminal.

What are the settings for [Device information]?

• [Off]: Connected device information is not displayed.
• [On]: Connected device information is displayed.

What should be noted about the [Device information] function?

• The obtained information of either signal or HDMI CEC is displayed.
• Up to the first 16 characters obtained are displayed.

What does the Wireless presentation link function do?

This menu configures the settings for wireless presentation system connection.

What does [Web ex link] do?

Sets the link of a Web ex device.

What are the settings for [Web ex link]?

• [Off]: Does not link with a Web ex device.
• [On]: Links with a Web ex device.

What should be noted about the [Web ex link] function?

• When a Web ex device is connected to the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN 3 terminal, the link function works.
• The following functions are fixed:
  • [Video conference mode settings] of the corresponding input is fixed to [On].
  • [Picture mode] is set to the suitable value.
  • [Over scan] is fixed to [Off].
  • [HDMI-CEC control] is fixed to [Enable]. [Display → Device] is fixed to [Power off / on]. [Device → Display] is fixed to [Power off / on].
  • [Quick start] is fixed to [On].
  • [Audio input select] is fixed to the corresponding input.
  • [HDMI-CEC control] is set to [Enable].
  • When another device is connected to an HDMI terminal other than the HDMI terminal to which a Web ex device is connected, if the HDMI-CEC control is unnecessary, turn off the HDMI-CEC function using that device.
  • When the link operation is in progress with a Web ex device connected, [Web ex] is displayed on the setup menu, etc.
  • Due to the specification of a Web ex device, the Web ex device cannot be set to standby mode by turning off (standby) the power of the display.

What is the [HDMI-CEC settings] function?

Set for HDMI-CEC function.

What is the submenu screen?

[HDMI-CEC settings] – submenu screen

What does [HDMI-CEC control] do?

Enables/Disables the HDMI-CEC function.

What are the settings for [HDMI-CEC control]?

• [Disable]: Disables HDMI-CEC control.
• [Enable]: Enables HDMI-CEC control.

What should be noted about the [HDMI-CEC control] function?

Set to [Enable] to operate HDMI-CEC compatible device with remote control of the unit.

What does [HDMI1] do?

Displays the device to operate when HDMI-CEC compatible device is connected to HDMI IN 1 terminal. The control subject can be changed with .

What should be noted about the [HDMI1] function?

When there is no connected device, [—-] will be displayed.

What does [HDMI2] do?

Displays the device to operate when HDMI-CEC compatible device is connected to HDMI IN 2 terminal. The control subject can be changed with .

What should be noted about the [HDMI2] function?

When there is no connected device, [—-] will be displayed.

What does [HDMI3] do?

Displays the device to operate when HDMI-CEC compatible device is connected to HDMI IN 3 terminal. The control subject can be changed with .

What should be noted about the [HDMI3] function?

When there is no connected device, [—-] will be displayed.

What does [SLOT] do?

Displays the device to operate when HDMI-CEC compatible device is connected to SLOT terminal.

What should be noted about the [SLOT] function?

• The setting item [SLOT] is displayed only when the function board is inserted into the SLOT. When the HDMI-CEC compatible SLOT is not connected, [—-] will be displayed.

What does [HDMI-CEC operation] do?

Displays the operation screen of the HDMI-CEC compatible device. Press <RETURN> to hide the operation screen.

What does [MENU code] do?

Changes the code to assign for the [MENU] operation on the HDMI-CEC operation screen. Adjust the code to that of the connected HDMI-CEC compatible device.

What does [Display → Device] do?

Enables/Disables this unit to perform interlocking control of the HDMI-CEC compatible device.

What are the settings for [Display → Device]?

• [Disable]: Disables this unit to perform interlocking control of the HDMI-CEC compatible device. Even if the power status of this unit changes, the power status of the device will not be affected.
• [Power off]: Turning this unit off (standby) turns off (standby) all the devices connected to the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2, HDMI IN 3 or SLOT terminal. The power-on operation is not interlocked.
• [Power off / on]: The device turns off/on (standby) in conjunction with the power-off/on (standby) operation of this unit.

What should be noted about the [Display → Device] function?

For details of operation, refer to “Using HDMI-CEC function”.

What does [Device → Display] do?

Enables/Disables the HDMI-CEC compatible device to perform interlocking control of this unit.

What are the settings for [Device → Display]?

• [Disable]: Disables the device to perform interlocking control of this unit. Even if the power status of the device changes, the power status of this unit will not be affected.
• [Power on]: Turning on the device turns on this unit, and the input (HDMI1 / HDMI2 / HDMI3 / SLOT) is switched to that of the device.
• [Power off / on]: The power status of this unit interlocks with the power-off/on operation of the device.

What should be noted about the [Device → Display] function?

For details of operation, refer to “Using HDMI-CEC function”.

What does [ARC] do?

Sets the audio output for the HDMI IN 3 (ARC) terminal.

What are the settings for [ARC]?

• [Auto]: Automatically outputs audio from the HDMI IN 3 terminal when an amplifier is connected.
• [Off]: Always outputs audio from the built-in speaker or the AUDIO OUT terminal.
• [On]: Always outputs audio from the HDMI IN 3 terminal.

What should be noted about the [ARC] function?

For details of the operations, refer to “Using ARC function”.

What does [Image settings] do?

Sets the image displayed on the screen when the power is turned on or no signal is input.

What is the submenu screen?

[Image settings] – submenu screen

What is [Startup image settings]?

Sets the image displayed when the power is turned on.

What is [No signal image settings]?

Sets the image displayed when there is no signal at the selected input terminal.

What are the Conditions of the image that can be set in [Read user image]?

• Image size: 3 840 x 2 160, 1 920 x 1 080 only
• jpg files / bmp files (except for the ones that cannot be played back with USB media player)

How are File and folder names displayed on the file list?

• If a file or folder is placed directly under the root directory of the USB device.
  • Up to 246 characters of file name (including the extension) are properly displayed. Note that the file list may disappear due to the display time of the on-screen menu before the entire display of file names completely appears.
  • Up to 244 characters of folder name are properly displayed.
• If the folder is placed hierarchically, the number of characters displayed decreases by the number of characters for the file path (folder information).
• Only the files with file names described with ASCII characters excluding control code are displayed.

What should be noted about the image settings?

• [Picture] cannot be adjusted when setting the startup image.
• Only [Backlight], [Gamma], [Colour temperature] and [Blue light reduction] can be adjusted when setting the no-signal image.
• Images displayed for the startup image and no-signal image may slightly differ from images confirmed on the computer.
• When [No signal image settings] is set to [On], [Input search] and [Failover/Failback] will be disabled, and the menu will be greyed out.

What do [Startup image settings] / [No signal image settings] do?

Operate [No signal image settings] in the same way as [Startup image settings].

What is the submenu screen?

[Startup image settings] – submenu screen

What does [Display setting] do?

Sets the image display when the power is turned on.

What are the settings for [Display setting]?

• [Off]: Disables each image setting function.
• [On]: Enables each image setting function.

What should be noted about the [Display setting] function?

• When no-signal image is displayed, the screen position moves at certain intervals and images are displayed to alleviate image retention on the LCD panel.
• Shifts the display position regardless of the setting of [Wobbling].
• When this function is operating, part of the screen may appear to be missing.

What does [Image select] do?

Select the image to display.

What are the settings for [Image Select]?

• [Default image]: Panasonic logo (blue background)
• [User image]: Image registered by the user

What should be noted about the [Image Select] function?

• Only when [Default image] is displayed, the logo automatically rotates according to the [Display orientation] setting or installation orientation.
• When [User image] is selected, the image does not rotate according to the [Display orientation] setting or installation orientation. Prepare an image of 3 840 × 2 160 or 1 920 × 1 080 aspect ratio compatible with the installation orientation.
• [Default image] of [No signal image settings] is the Panasonic logo (black background).

What does [Read user image] do?

Register the image read from a USB memory device.

What is the submenu screen?

[Read user image] – submenu screen.

What should be noted about the [Read user image] function?

• Set the input to something other than [USB], [MEMORY VIEWER] or [WHITEBOARD], and read the image.
• One user image can be registered for [Startup image settings] and [No signal image settings] respectively.
• Do not turn the power off while reading the user image.
• The selected image is previewed on the [Read user image] submenu screen.
• When USB memory device is not connected to the USB terminal, [Read user image] is greyed out and cannot be selected.
• If starting to read the image while creating the preview image, an access error will occur, and the image may not be recognized as an image file. Confirm the preview image display, and then start reading the process.
• The displayed file names are restricted as follows:
  • Applicable extension: jpg, jpe, jpeg or bmp
  • The file name is not “.jpg”, “.jpe”, “.jpeg”, or “.bmp” which start with dot (.).
• Depending on the OS setting, folders or files in the USB memory invisible on your computer may be displayed on this unit.
• If an image of 3 840 × 2 160 is registered for [Startup image settings], and [Image select] is set to [User image], the start-up time will be longer at power-on.
• If an image of 3 840 × 2 160 is registered for [No signal image settings], the displayed image quality will be equivalent to 1 920 × 1 080.
• Even when [Internal memory] is selected for [Use memory select], images are loaded from the USB memory device. (images cannot be loaded from the internal memory.)

What does [Clear user image] do?

Clears the image read in [Read user image].

What is the submenu screen?

[Startup image settings] – submenu screen

What should be noted about the [Clear user image] function?

• When there is no [User image] that have been read, [Clear user image] is greyed out and cannot be selected.
• When [Image select] is set to [User image], performing [Clear user image] will change the setting of [Image select] to [Default image].

What does [Input lock] do?

Disables [Input] operation by locking the input.

What are the settings for [Input lock]?

[Off] / [HDMI1] / [HDMI2] / [HDMI3] / [USB-C] / [SLOT] / [PC] / [PC [YPBPR]] / [Screen Transfer] / [USB/Internal Memory] / [MEMORY VIEWER] / [WHITEBOARD]

What should be noted about the [Input lock] function?

Input switch can be used when this is set to [Off].

What does [Off-timer function] do?

Enables / disables [Off-timer function].

What are the settings for [Off-timer function]?

• [Enable]: Enables [Off-timer function].
• [Disable]: Disables [Off-timer function].

What should be noted about the [Off-timer function]?

When [Disable] is set, the Off-timer is canceled.

What happens when the [No activity power off] is set to [Enable]?

The power is turned off (standby) automatically when there is no operation of the Display for 4 hours. Starting from 3 minutes before the turn off, the remaining time will be displayed.

What message will be displayed when the power is turned on after the power is turned off due to the [No activity power off] function?

A message [Last turn off due to ‘No activity power off’.] is displayed next time the power is turned on. When the image set in [No signal image settings] is displayed, the remaining time is not displayed even when the power is going to be turned off in 3 minutes. Instead, the image is displayed until the power is turned off.

What should be noted about the [No activity power off] function?

While the screensaver is running, this function is disabled.

What does the [Language] function do?

Select your preferred language.

What languages can be selected?

• English(UK)
• Deutsch
• Français
• Italiano
• Español
• ENGLISH(US)
• 中文 : Chinese
• 日本語 : Japanese
• Русский : Russian

What does the [Multi display settings] function do?

Set the screen display mode.

What should be noted about the [Multi display settings] function?

• Set the input to something other than [Screen Transfer] / [MEMORY VIEWER] / [WHITEBOARD], and then set [Multi display settings].
• While this menu is displayed, aspect mode will be [16:9].

What does the [Multi screen display] function do?

• [Off]: The display is not divided when enlarged.
• [On]: The display is divided when enlarged. When [On] is set, the display aspect is [Full].

What should be noted about the [Multi screen display] function?

When [Portrait display] is [On], this menu will be greyed out and cannot be set.

What does the [Multi screen display] function do?

1 to 10 displays can be aligned in horizontal direction and vertical direction respectively, and those displays are regarded as one group. The enlarged image is shown on the combined display.

What is the submenu screen?

[Multi display settings] – submenu screen ([Multi screen display])

What should be noted about the [Multi screen display] function?

• The settings are memorized separately for each input terminal.
• If misalignment occurs between the displays, adjust [Position] to the same angle of view for [Position]. Then, set [Multi screen display] to [On]. Again, make fine adjustment of the angle of view for [Position].
• The [Position] menu can be adjusted in the multi-screen display status.
• When USB/Internal Memory, MEMORY VIEWER, Screen Transfer or WHITEBOARD input is selected, [Frame control] cannot be set.
• The [Frame control] function is effective when all of the vertical synchronizations input into each display are the same.
• In the multi-screen display, the aspect is set to [Full].
• For USB/Internal Memory input, [Horizontal scale] and [Vertical scale] can be set only with the following combinations:
  • 1 × 2, 1 × 3, 1 × 4, 2 × 1, 2 × 2, 3 × 1, 4 × 1

What does [Horizontal scale] do?

Set the horizontal scale in the multi-screen display.

What are the settings for [Horizontal scale]?

1 to 10

What does [Vertical scale] do?

Set the vertical scale in the multi-screen display.

What are the settings for [Vertical scale]?

1 to 10

What do [Bezel H adjustment] / [Bezel V adjustment] do?

Adjust the area of image hidden in the joint horizontally and vertically respectively.

What are the settings for [Bezel H adjustment] / [Bezel V adjustment]?

0 to 100

What is a suitable setting when displaying character information on PC?

Setting value: 0

What is a suitable setting when displaying motion pictures?

Setting value: 100

What does [Location] do?

Assign screen positions on the multi-screen.

What should be noted about the [Location] function?

• The displayed content for setting changes according to the settings for the [Horizontal scale] and [Vertical scale].
• By setting [Multi screen display] to [Off], it is possible to check the location on the screen while the setting menu is displayed.
• If [Image rotation] is set to [180 degrees], the enlarged location also rotates.

What should be noted about the [Location] function?

[Horizontal scale] \ / [Vertical scale] \ cannot be set.

What does [Frame control] do?

Adjusts the image display timing to display motion pictures more naturally on one screen with multiple screen configurations.

What are the settings for [Frame control]?

• Auto: When [Multi screen display] is set to [On], the image display timing is automatically adjusted according to [Location] in the vertical direction. However, when [Multi screen display] is set to [Off], the adjusted value of the image display timing is fixed to \ (no adjustment).
• 1 to 4: Adjusted value of the image display timing (manual setting) Operation is performed regardless of [On] / [Off] setting for [Multi screen display].

What should be noted about the [Frame control] function?

• [Video conference mode settings] and [Frame control] cannot be used simultaneously. Only one of them can be used.
• When any of \ to \ is set, and signals over a vertical frequency of 60Hz are input, the unit may not perform control operation as intended. Also, if signals over 2 160 dots in vertical direction are input, a screen error may occur.
• When the setting of this function is changed, image noise may occur. This is not a malfunction.

What does [Portrait settings] do?

This function displays input images by rotating 90°.

What should be noted about the [Portrait settings] function?

• Set to the input other than [Screen Transfer] / [MEMORY VIEWER] / [WHITEBOARD], and then set [Portrait settings].
• For video or picture you want to display, use the ones with 16:9 resolutions.
• About playing back with USB/Internal Memory input, refer to “Using “USB media player”.
• While this menu is displayed, aspect mode will be [16:9].

What is the submenu screen?

[Portrait settings] – submenu screen

What does [Portrait display] do?

• [Off]: Disables portrait display.
• [On]: Enables portrait display. When it is set to [On], aspect mode will be [Full].

What does [Installation method] do?

Sets the installation method of displays that make up the portrait display.

What are the settings for [Installation method]?

• [Portrait 1 screen]: Setting configuration of [Portrait 1 screen]
• [Portrait 3 screens]: Setting configuration of [Portrait 3 screens]
• [Landscape 3 screens]: Setting configuration of [Landscape 3 screens]

What does [Display format] do?

• [Full]: Displays the entire input images so that the image is displayed without missing portion.
• [16:9 V fit]: (When [Installation method] is [Landscape 3 screens]) Displays images without missing portion, however, some portion of the input images on the top and bottom is cut.
• [16:9 H fit]: (When [Installation method] is [Landscape 3 screens]) Displays the entire input images, however, some portion of the images on right and left is not displayed.
• [16:9 V fit]: (When [Installation method] is [Portrait 3 screens]) Displays images without missing portion, however, some portion of the input images on the right and left is cut.
• [16:9 H fit]: (When [Installation method] is [Portrait 3 screens]) Displays the entire input images, however, some portion of the images on top and bottom is not displayed.

What should be noted about the [Display format] function?

[16:9 V fit] and [16:9 H fit] keep the aspect ratio 16:9, but [Full] doesn’t.

What does [Bezel adjustment] do?

Adjusts the area of the image hidden in the joint area on the portrait screen.

What are the settings for [Bezel adjustment]?

0 to 100

What does [Location] do?

Assign the positions of portrait screens.

What are the settings for [Location]?

• [Upper] / [Centre] / [Lower] (When [Installation method] is [Landscape 3 screens])
• [Left] / [Centre] / [Right] (When [Installation method] is [Portrait 3 screens])

What should be noted about the [Location] function?

• When [Portrait display] is set to [Off], the enlarged position can be confirmed on the screen if [Installation method] is set to [Portrait 3 screens].

What should be noted about the [Portrait settings] function?

• The settings are memorized separately for each input terminal.
• It is possible to set [Display format], [Bezel adjustment] and [Location] when [Installation method] is [Portrait 3 screens] or [Landscape 3 screens].
• This menu will be greyed out and cannot be set under the following conditions:
  • When [Multi display settings] – [Multi-screen display] is [On].
• When [Portrait display] is [On], the aspect mode cannot be changed.

How do you enable the WhiteBoard function?

The WhiteBoard function can be enabled by setting [Whiteboard] to [On].

How do you disable the WhiteBoard function?

The WhiteBoard function can be disabled by setting [Whiteboard] to [Off].

Where can you display the Control menu?

The Control menu can be displayed at the top or bottom of the screen.

You can select the position to display the Control menu:

• [Top]: The Control menu is displayed at the top of the screen.
• [Bottom]: The Control menu is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

How do you set the position where the Control menu is minimized?

You can set the position where the Control menu is minimized by setting [Shrink position].

The following options are available:

• [Left]: Sets the shrink position to the left.
• [Centre]: Sets the shrink position to the centre.
• [Right]: Set the shrink position to the right.
• [Left2]: Sets the shrink position to the left (one level inside).
• [Centre2]: Sets the shrink position to the centre (one level inside).
• [Right2]: Sets the shrink position to the right (one level inside).

How do you enable the operation for the menu display button in the Control menu?

You can enable the operation for the menu display button in the Control menu by setting [Menu lock] to [Off].

How do you disable the operation for the menu display button in the Control menu?

You can disable the operation for the menu display button in the Control menu by setting [Menu lock] to [On].

What are the operations that are valid regardless of whether [Menu lock] is set to Off/On?

Operations after the menu is displayed by remote control operation are valid.

What do the Quick input settings do?

The Quick input settings set the input signal assigned to the input selector button on the Control menu.

What does setting [HDMI1] to [On] in the Video conference mode settings do?

Setting [HDMI1] to [On] in the Video conference mode settings configures the setting of input from the HDMI IN 1 terminal suitable for video conferences.

What does setting [HDMI2] to [On] in the Video conference mode settings do?

Setting [HDMI2] to [On] in the Video conference mode settings configures the setting of input from the HDMI IN 2 terminal suitable for video conferences.

What does setting [HDMI3] to [On] in the Video conference mode settings do?

Setting [HDMI3] to [On] in the Video conference mode settings configures the setting of input from the HDMI IN 3 terminal suitable for video conferences.

What does setting [USB-C] to [On] in the Video conference mode settings do?

Setting [USB-C] to [On] in the Video conference mode settings configures the setting of input from the USB-C HOST terminal suitable for video conferences.

What functions can’t be used simultaneously as the Video conference mode settings?

[Video conference mode settings] and [Frame control] cannot be used simultaneously.

What are some of the functions that cannot be used when the Video conference mode settings is enabled?

When the Video conference mode settings is enabled the following functions cannot be used:

• Digital zoom
• [Screensaver] – [Wobbling]
• [Multi display settings]
• [Portrait settings]
• [Image rotation]

What WhiteBoard-related functions cannot be used when the Video conference mode settings is enabled?

When the Video conference mode settings is enabled the following WhiteBoard-related functions cannot be used:

• Built-in WhiteBoard
• Comparison mode
• Capture
• Zoom

What is the maximum number of programs that can be set for the Set up timer function?

Up to 20 programs can be set.

What should you do if the current time is displayed as [- -]?

If the current time is displayed as [- -], you should set [Date and time] before setting [Set up timer].

What happens when multiple programs are set at the same time for the Set up timer function?

When multiple programs are set at the same time, the program with the smallest program number is enabled.

What happens if [Power mode] is set to [Power on] and the program is executed at power-on?

If [Power mode] is set to [Power on], executing the program at power-on will switch to the input set for [Input].

What does Setting Example: Program 1, Every Monday, 12:00, Power On, Input: HDMI1 mean?

It is a setting example for the Set up timer, meaning Program 1 will execute every Monday at 12:00, turning the power on and setting the input to HDMI1.

How do you set the program number for the Set up timer function?

You can set the program number by pressing the number button corresponding to the program number.

How do you execute the program for the Set up timer function?

To execute the program, set [Timer function] to [On].

How do you disable the program for the Set up timer function?

The program is disabled when [Timer function] is set to [Off].

How do you set the day for the Set up timer function?

You can set the day by using the following options:

• [Everyday]: Executes the program every day.
• [Weekday]: Executes the program from every Monday to Friday.
• [Weekend]: Executes the program on Saturdays and Sundays.
• [Custom]: Executes the program on selected days.

How do you change the time for the Set up timer function?

You can change the time by pressing the or buttons.

Pressing once changes time 1 minute.

Pressing continuously changes time by 15 minutes.

How do you set the power On/Off for the Set up timer function?

You can set the power On/Off by pressing the or buttons.

How do you set the input for the Set up timer function?

You can set the input by pressing the or buttons.

How do you create a customized setting for days of the week for the Set up timer function?

To create a customized setting for days of the week for the Set up timer:

1. Set [Day] to [Custom].
2. While [Day] is selected, press <ENTER>. The [Day] screen appears.
3. Change the setting, press <ENTER>, and return to the timer setup screen.

What button do you press to select days in the [Day] screen?

Use the <> buttons. (Put check marks on days to select.)

What button do you press to cancel the day selection in the [Day] screen?

Use the <> button. (Delete a check mark if it has been put.)

What button do you press to save the current setting and return to the timer setup screen?

Press <ENTER>.

What button do you press to return to the timer setup screen without saving the current setting?

Press <RETURN>.

What button do you press to select/cancel all days in the [Day] screen?

Press [All].

What should you use for the “Customized setting for days of the week” operation?

Use the remote control.

What happens if the [Day] screen is deleted without pressing <ENTER>?

If the [Day] screen is deleted without pressing <ENTER>, the setting is not saved.

How do you set the date and time?

You can set the date and time in the [Date and time] submenu.

1. Select [Year / Month / Day / Hour / Minute].
2. Set the selected item.
3. Select [Set] and press <ENTER>.

What happens if the present date and time are not set?

If the present date and time are not set, the time settings for [Set up timer], [Screensaver], etc. cannot be made.

When is the present date and time setting reset?

The present date and time setting is reset in the following case:

When the main unit is left unattended for 7 days or longer after the main unit is turned off with the <Main Power On / Off button>, the power plug is removed, or power failure has occurred, etc.

What may happen if the unit is used for long periods or in a high temperature environment?

If the unit is used for long periods or in a high temperature environment, days to reset may be shorter than 7 days.

When can’t you set the date and time?

Date and time cannot be set when [Year / Month / Day / Hour / Minute] are set to [- -].

What is the maximum date and time that can be set?

The maximum date and time that can be set is:

Year 2035, Month 12, Day 31, Hour 23 and Minute 59.

How do you set the Clock display to hide the clock?

Set the [Clock display] to [Off].

How do you set the Clock display to show the clock?

Set the [Clock display] to [On].

When is the clock displayed on the screen?

The clock is displayed at the lower left of the screen when <RECALL> button is pressed.

How long does the clock display last on the screen?

The display duration is approx. 5 seconds.

When is the clock not displayed even when [Clock display] is [On]?

When the current date and time is not set.

What does the Synchronize display setting do?

Synchronizes the time of all the displays connected on the network.

When does the Synchronize display setting not operate?

This function does not operate if the displays to synchronize the time are not connected via a LAN.

When does this function operate?

This function operates only when the devices connected via a LAN are connected with different IP addresses.

In what state does the time synchronization operate?

The time synchronization operates only in power-on state or in schedule standby state.

When is normal operation achieved with the Synchronize display setting?

Normal operation is achieved only when the display synchronization function is enabled among the units.

What may happen if other devices are connected on the same network?

Operation may not be normal.

What does [Synchronize display] do?

[Synchronize display] enables/disables display synchronization function.

What does [Parent or child setting] do?

[Parent or child setting] sets the unit to [Parent] or [Child] for display synchronization. It operates when [Synchronize display] is [On].

What does the [Parent] option for [Parent or child setting] do?

[Parent]: Set the time as a source of synchronization.

What does the [Child] option for [Parent or child setting] do?

[Child]: Synchronizes with the time of the parent.

When can’t the date and time be set?

When [Synchronize display] is [On], and [Parent or child setting] is [Child], date and time cannot be set.

What off-operation is performed when [Synchronize display] is [On], and [Parent or child setting] is [Child]?

The [NTP synchronization] off-operation is performed.

What happens if two or more displays with [Parent] set are present on one network?

Display synchronization does not operate properly.

What happens if no displays with [Parent] set are present on one network?

Time is not synchronized.

What happens if the time is not set for the display with [Parent] set on the network?

Time is not synchronized.

What might happen if the distance between the displays with [Parent] and [Child] set are too far apart?

The accuracy of time synchronization may be largely lost.

When is synchronization not possible?

Synchronization is not possible if a router is placed between the displays with [Parent] and [Child] set. Synchronization is not possible via a wireless LAN.

What does the [NTP status] do?

Displays the current [NTP synchronization] and [Time zone] settings.

What does [NTP synchronization] show when [NTP synchronization] is set to [On], and if [Synchronize display] and [Parent or child setting] are set to [On] and [Child] respectively?

[NTP synchronization] shows [–], and the off-operation is performed.

When can’t date and time be set?

When [NTP synchronization] is [On], date and time cannot be set.

How can you change the settings for [NTP synchronization] and [Time zone]?

Change the settings with WEB browser.

In what state does [NTP synchronization] operate?

[NTP synchronization] operates only in power-on state or in schedule standby state.

When are the DIGITAL LINK-related menus displayed?

The DIGITAL LINK-related menus are displayed when the DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board is attached to the expansion slot (SLOT).

What does [Administrator account settings] do?

Configure the administrator account settings.

What does [Password policy] do?

Precautions for password settings of this item will be displayed in a new window.

How do you enter the user name?

The keyboard for setting the user name is displayed. Enter the user name.

How do you enter the password?

The keyboard for setting the password is displayed. After entering the password, select [Ok]; the confirmation screen is displayed. Enter the password again and select [Ok]; the password is determined.

How do you save the determined user name and password?

Select [Save].

What is required once the user name and password are determined?

Once determined, it is necessary to enter the user name and password to display the settings.

What does setting [Network control] to [Off] do?

Invalidates control with LAN terminal. In this case, the power consumption of Standby condition (when the power is turned off with the remote control) will be slightly reduced.

What does setting [Network control] to [On] do?

Controls via LAN using the LAN terminal. The power indicator lights purple when the power is turned off with the remote control (standby).

When should you set this function to [On]?

When using the LAN control function set this function to [On].

What Web browser control screens operate even if the [Network control] setting is set to [Off]?

Even if the setting is set to [Off], the Web browser control screens that do not control this unit (display information [Status], detailed settings [Detailed set up] and password change [Change password]) operate.

What setting should be set to [On] to enable the [Network control] operation?

Set [Quick start] to [On].

What happens when [Quick start] is set to [Off]?

When [Quick start] is set to [Off], the power can be turned off via network control even if [Network control] is set to [On]. However, the power cannot be turned on from standby state with the exception after a wake-up message (magic packet) is sent from the network equipment in the network.

What should be set to [On] to control both power on and off via network control?

To control both power on and off via network control, it is necessary to set both [Quick start] and [Network control] to [On] respectively.

What does [PJLink settings] do?

Configure the PJLink settings to enable PJLink communication on the unit.

What does [PJLink control] do?

Specifies the PJLink communication settings.

The following options are available:

• Off: Disables PJLink control.
• On: Enables PJLink control.

How do you set the password for the [PJLink settings]?

The keyboard for setting the password is displayed. After entering the password, select [Ok]; the confirmation screen is displayed. Enter the password again and select [Ok]; the password is determined.

When should you set [PJLink notification]?

Set this item when using the PJLink notification.

The following options are available:

• [Off]: Disables the notification.
• [On]: Enables the notification.

What do [Notified IP address 1] and [Notified IP address 2] do?

Set the IP address of the PC where the status of this unit is notified.

How do you save the determined [PJLink settings] password in the display unit?

Select [Save].

What must you do to display the settings once the [PJLink settings] password is determined?

Once determined, it is necessary to enter the password to display the settings.

What must you configure in advance to set the [PJLink settings] to [On]?

To set the setting to [On], you must configure [Administrator account settings] in advance.

What do you need to do to use PJLink control?

To use PJLink control, you need to set [On] to the setting and set [Network control] to [On].

Is the [PJLink settings] password the same as the password for [LAN setup]?

No. The password for the setting is different from the password for [LAN setup].

What does the [AMX D. D.] setting do?

Set whether to allow the Display to be detected by AMX Device Discovery.

The following options are available:

• [Off]: Disables detection by AMX Device Discovery.
• [On]: Enables detection by AMX Device Discovery.

What must you configure in advance to set the [AMX D. D.] setting to [On]?

To set the setting to [On], you must configure [Administrator account settings] in advance.

What happens when the [Crestron Connected] function is set to [On]?

When this function is set to [On], the Display can be monitored or controlled via the network using equipment and application software of Crestron Electronics, Inc. This Display supports the following application software from Crestron Electronics, Inc.:

• Crestron Fusion

What is Crestron Connected?

Crestron Connected is a function to connect to a system developed by Crestron Electronics, Inc. which manages and controls multiple system devices connected to the network.

What must you configure in advance to set the [Crestron Connected] setting to [On]?

To set the setting to [On], you must configure [Administrator account settings] in advance.

What does the [LAN setup] function do?

Detailed network settings for the LAN can be configured.

How do you access the [LAN setup] screen?

Select [LAN setup] with the buttons and press <ENTER>.

What does the [DHCP] setting do?

Press to set [On] / [Off] of DHCP. When [Off] is selected, IP address and other settings can be set manually.

• DHCP: (DHCP client function)

The following options are available:

• [On]: Obtains an IP address automatically when a DHCP server exists in the network the Display is going to be connected.
• [Off]: When a DHCP server does not exist in the network the Display is going to be connected, set IP address, Subnet mask and Gateway manually.

What does the [IP address] setting do?

(IP address display and setting) Enter an IP address when DHCP server is not used.

What does the [Subnet mask] setting do?

(Subnet mask display and setting) Enter a Subnet mask when DHCP server is not used.

What does the [Gateway] setting do?

(Gateway address display and setting) Enter a gateway address when DHCP server is not used.

What happens to the IP address and other settings when [DHCP] is set to [On]?

When DHCP is set to [On], the IP address, etc. will be displayed in grey.

How do you enter numbers for the [IP address] setting?

1. Select the address and press <ENTER>.
2. Select digits with the buttons.
3. Change numbers with the buttons.
4. Press <ENTER>.

How do you cancel a number change in the [IP address] setting?

You can cancel the change by pressing <RETURN>.

What does [Save] do?

Save the current network Setup.

What should you do to use a DHCP server?

To use a DHCP server, make sure the DHCP server is started.

What is the shipping condition for [DHCP], [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway]?

Shipping condition:

What does [Command port] do?

Set the port number used for command control.

How do you set the number for [Command port]?

Select [Command port] and press <ENTER> to set the number.

What is the available setting range for [Command port]?

The available setting range is 1024 ‒ 65535.

Is port setting necessary when the PJLink protocol is used?

No. When the PJLink protocol is used, the port setting is not necessary.

What does [EAP] do?

Select the EAP that has been set for the RADIUS server. If the EAP has not been set, select [None].

The types of EAPs that can be set are as follows: [PEAP(MS-CHAPv2)], [PEAP(GTC)], [EAP-TTLS(MD5)], [EAP-TTLS(MS-CHAPv2)], [EAP-FAST(MS-CHAPv2)], [EAP-FAST(GTC)], [EAP-TLS]

What does [User name] do?

Enter the user name for authentication with one-byte alphanumeric characters (excluding space). (Up to 64 characters)

When can [User name] be set?

This can be set only when [EAP] is set to items other than [None] or [EAP-TLS].

What does [Password] do?

Enter the password for authentication with one-byte alphanumeric characters. (Up to 64 characters)

When can [Password] be set?

This can be set only when [EAP] is set to items other than [None] or [EAP-TLS].

What needs to be done to the unit when EAP is used?

When EAP is used, this unit needs to be configured according to the settings of the RADIUS server. For the settings of the RADIUS server, consult with the network administrator.

What should you do when [EAP] is set to [EAP-TLS]?

When [EAP] is set to [EAP-TLS], set [Date and time] and register the certificate on the WEB browser control.

What does [MAC address] do?

Displays the MAC address of this unit.

What does [Network status] do?

Checks the current Network settings status.

What does [DIGITAL LINK mode] do?

Switches communication method of DIGITAL LINK terminal.

The following options are available:

• [Auto]: Communication method is selected automatically. HDMI, LAN, serial communication are possible. Ethernet connection is possible.
• [DIGITAL LINK]: HDMI, LAN, serial communication are possible via a twisted pair cable transmitter.
• [Ethernet]: LAN communication is performed.
• [Long reach]: Communication method is fixed to Long reach.

What is the maximum transmission distance when connected with the [Long reach] communication method?

When connected with the [Long reach] communication method, the maximum transmission distance is 150 m.

What signals can the unit receive when connected with the [Long reach] communication method?

In this case, this unit can receive the signals of up to 1080/60p (148.5 MHz).

What should you do if the communication method of the twisted pair cable transmitter is set to [Long reach]?

Set [DIGITAL LINK mode] to [Auto].

What communication method will be enabled after setting [DIGITAL LINK mode] to [Auto] when the communication method of the twisted pair cable transmitter is set to [Long reach]?

Connection is enabled with the [Long reach] communication method.

What might happen when connecting with the separately sold DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board set to the communication method of [Long reach], when the twisted pair cable transmitter does not support the communication method of [Long reach]?

It will not be connected properly.

What happens when [LAN terminal setting] is set to [LAN terminal], even if [DIGITAL LINK mode] is set to [Ethernet]?

The Ethernet connection cannot be made.

What does [DIGITAL LINK status] do?

Display the DIGITAL LINK connection environment.

How do you access the [DIGITAL LINK status] screen?

Select [DIGITAL LINK status] with the buttons and press <ENTER>.

What does [LINK status] do?

1 of the followings will be displayed:

• [No link]: No LAN connection, etc.
• [DIGITAL LINK]: Connected to the DIGITAL LINK device by LAN.
• [Long reach]: Communication method is set to [Long reach] and is connected to the DIGITAL LINK device by LAN.
• [Ethernet]: The PC is connected to the DIGITAL LINK / LAN terminal of this product and is LAN connected.

What does [HDMI status] do?

Displays the connection status of the HDMI format. 1 of the followings will be displayed:

• [No HDMI]: DIGITAL LINK not connected
• [HDMI on]: DIGITAL LINK connected
• [HDCP on]: HDCP supported on DIGITAL LINK

What does [Signal quality] do?

It is the quantified minimum and maximum numbers of errors that have occurred. The display colours are red, yellow, or blue, depending on the number.

What does the signal quality represent when the number is represented by yellow or red?

The number is represented by yellow or red if the LAN cable is disconnected or the cable is not shielded.

What does [DIGITAL LINK menu] do?

Displays the setting menu of Digital Interface Box.

How do you access the [DIGITAL LINK menu] screen?

Select [DIGITAL LINK menu] with the buttons and press <ENTER>.

When can the [DIGITAL LINK menu] be selected?

This function can only be selected when the Panasonic device that supports DIGITAL LINK output (ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to a DIGITAL LINK IN terminal of DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board and its power is on.

When should you set [Extron XTP] to [On]?

Set to [On] when connecting XTP Transmitter made by Extron to DIGITAL LINK IN terminal of DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board.

What needs to be set when this item is set to [On]?

When this item is set to [On], [Administrator account settings] needs to be set.

What does [Auto display name] do?

Sets whether to change the display name automatically.

The following options are available:

• [Off]: The display name is not changed automatically.
• [On]: Changes the display name automatically in accordance with the set point of the display ID.

What does [Display name] do?

The name of the Display that is shown on the network can be changed.

When can the display name be changed?

The name can be changed only when [Auto display name] is set to [Off].

Is Display ID reset to default with [Network settings] – [Reset]?

No. Display ID is not reset to default with [Network settings] – [Reset].

What does [USB memory network settings] do?

Sets whether to permit the network setting using the USB memory device.

The following options are available:

• [Permit]: Permits USB memory network settings.
• [Prohibit]: Prohibits USB memory network settings.

What is the factory default setting for this function?

This function is set to [Permit] as factory default.

What happens once the network setting is done with USB memory device?

This function is set to [Prohibit].

What does selecting [Protocol 1] do?

Control with the Panasonic Display sequence.

What does selecting [Protocol 2] do?

Control with the sequence that is compatible with Panasonic Projector.

What operations are possible regardless of the protocol setting?

For PJLink and WEB browser control, the operation is possible regardless of the setting.

What protocol should you select when operating the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”?

Select [Protocol 2].

What does the [Reset] function do?

You can reset the network setting to the factory default of the Display.

How do you reset the network settings to the factory default?

Select [Yes] with the buttons and press <ENTER>.

What settings will be reset to the factory default?

The settings for [NTP synchronization], NTP server and [Time zone] will be reset to the factory default.

What is necessary to input when commanding [Reset] when [Security password] – [Security password] is set to [On]?

It is necessary to input the password when commanding [Reset].

What does the [USB media player settings] do?

Set for “USB media player”. For details of the function, refer to “USB media player”.

What is accessed when [USB] is selected for [Use memory select]?

A USB memory device inserted to the USB terminal is used.

What is accessed when [Internal memory] is selected for [Use memory select]?

The internal memory is used.

What does [USB media player] do?

Set to enable or disable the USB media player function.

What does [Schedule play function] do?

Enables/Disables the schedule playback function using “Content Management Software”.

What operation takes priority if both the scenario file of the existing “USB media player” and the schedule file of this function are present when [Schedule play function] is set to [Enable]?

The [Schedule play function] operation takes priority.

Can [USB media player] be changed during the schedule playback mode?

No. [USB media player] cannot be changed during the schedule playback mode.

What should you set to [On] to enable the operation when [Schedule play function] is set to [Enable]?

Set [Quick start] to [On] to enable the operation.

What happens when [Quick start] is set to [Off] even if [Schedule play function] is set to [Enable]?

When [Quick start] is set to [Off], the unit enters the standby state according to the schedule even if it is set to [Enable]. However, the unit does not start up. To operate the Schedule play function, it is necessary to set [Quick start] to [On] and [Schedule play function] to [Enable].

What does [Video playback mode] do?

Sets the video playback mode. If image disturbance occurs at the switching timing of motion picture files during playback in [Standard] mode, switch to [Adjust] mode.

The following options are available:

• [Standard]: Plays without a black image at the joint between video files.
• [Adjust]: Plays with a black image (approx. 2 seconds) inserted at the joint between video files.

What happens when using the Multi Media Player?

A black screen is displayed for a certain period of time at the switching timing of motion picture files regardless of the [Video playback mode] settings.

What may happen to the display at the switching timing of files during playback in [Standard] mode?

The display may be disturbed at the switching timing of files during playback in [Standard] mode.

When can the [Video playback mode] be switched in single and multi mode?

When the schedule playback is proceeding using “Content Management Software”.

What does [Resume play] do?

Set resume play off/on.

What does [Still picture rotation] do?

Sets the display method of still pictures by USB/Internal Memory input.

The following options are available:

• [Landscape]: Displays still pictures horizontally.
• [Portrait]: Displays still pictures vertically.
• [Exif information]: The display rotates according to the file information.

When does [Exif information] perform the rotation operation?

[Exif information] performs the rotation operation only in the JPEG format to which Exif information is added.

How do you set the type of content to display?

The type of content to display can be set to the following:

• [All]: Displays all the files including picture, video and music files.
• [Picture / Video]: Displays picture files and video files.
• [Picture / Music]: Displays picture files and music files.
• [Video / Music]: Displays video files and music files.
• [Picture]: Displays picture files only.
• [Video]: Displays video files only.
• [Music]: Displays music files only.

How do you set the order of content?

Set the order of content by using the Sort type and Sort order settings.

How do you set the playback method of content?

You can set the playback method of content by using the Play method setting. The options are as follows:

• [None]: Automatically returns to the content display screen when the playback of the selected file has finished.
• [Single]: Plays the selected file repeatedly.
• [All]: Plays the content displayed on the content display screen repeatedly in the displayed order.
• [Random]: Plays the content displayed on the content display screen at random.
• [Select]: Plays the selected files in the sorting order shown on the content display screen.
• [Program]: Plays the selected file in selected order.

How do you set the display time of still picture files?

You can set the display time of still picture files using the Picture duration setting. You can set the display time from 10 seconds to 600 seconds.

How do you automatically display content information at the beginning of content playback?

To automatically display content information at the beginning of content playback, set Auto display content info to [On]. The information will automatically be erased after a certain period of time. If you set this setting to [On], the operation guide will also be automatically displayed at the beginning of content playback, and the information will be automatically erased after a certain period of time. The playback control is performed only while the operation guide is being displayed. If it is not displayed, the unit shows the operation guide without performing the playback control.

If you set this setting to [Off], the operation guide is not displayed at the beginning of the content playback. The playback control is performed regardless of Show/Hide of the operation guide.

Are there any notes about the Play method and content playback?

Yes, there are a few. When Play method is set to Single, playback information and the operation guide are automatically displayed only at the beginning of the first playback of content. When the Play method is Select or Program, up to 99 files can be selected. This menu will be grayed out and cannot be set while content is being played.

How do you enable or disable the function to display images using Panasonic’s dedicated application “Screen Transfer”?

You can enable or disable the Screen Transfer function by going to the Screen Transfer settings submenu screen, and going to the Screen Transfer function Enable setting.

How do you enable or disable video interruption by another user while displaying a video using “Screen Transfer”?

You can enable or disable video interruption by going to the Screen Transfer settings submenu screen, and going to the Cut in setting. [Off] disables video interruption and [On] enables it.

How do you set whether to require the input of a PIN code when connecting to this unit using “Screen Transfer”?

You can set whether to require the input of a PIN code when connecting to this unit using Screen Transfer by going to the Screen Transfer settings submenu screen, and going to the PIN code setting. Setting the PIN code setting to [Off] will not require the input of the PIN code. Setting it to [On] will require the input of the PIN code.

Where can you find more information about the settings for wireless presentation system connection?

You can find more information about the settings for wireless presentation system connection in the operating instructions on the following support site: https://panasonic.net/cns/prodisplays/wps2/.

How do you assign specific functions to the numeric buttons (<1> to <6>)?

You can assign specific functions to the numeric buttons (<1> to <6>) in the Function button settings. These buttons can be used as shortcut keys by assigning frequently used operations.

How do you select the numeric button?

Select the numeric button with the button and press <ENTER>.

How do you set the function display when numeric buttons are pressed?

You can set the function display when numeric buttons are pressed using the Function button guide. You can set this for each function group. Setting it to [On] will display the function list for the numeric buttons. Setting it to [Off] will not display the function list. Operation starts when the numeric buttons are pressed.

Is there a way to view the function button guide regardless of the On/Off settings?

Yes, you can view the function button guide regardless of the On/Off settings by pressing <FUNCTION>.

How do you use the shortcut (numeric buttons)?

You can use the shortcut (number buttons) by following these steps:

1. Press <FUNCTION> or <1> ‒ <6>. The function button guide will be displayed. When [Off] is set, pressing the numeric button starts operation.
2. Press <1> ‒ <6>. The function for the pressed button starts to operate.

How do you set color design?

To set the color design, go to the Colour design settings submenu.

How do you change the color design settings?

Set [Universal] or [Original] and select [Save]. [Original] increases the number of color palettes that can be used on the WhiteBoard. [Universal] enables color combinations giving consideration to universal design. Palettes of colors that are easy to see on the WhiteBoard are used. Once you have chosen a setting, a confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] to apply the setting.

When will the color design settings change take place?

The color design settings change will be reflected from the next power on.

Are there any notes about changing the color design settings?

Yes, there are two notes about changing the color design settings. After the setting is changed, the changed setting will be applied after the power is turned on the next time. Turn the power off by pressing <Main Power On / Off button> ( ). If the <Main Power On / Off button> is locked, please disconnect the AC cord plug from the wall outlet. When it is set to [Universal], a message is displayed at startup.

How do you make changes to the settings for the on-screen menus?

You can make changes to the settings for the on-screen menus in the OSD settings submenu screen.

How do you set the display position of the on-screen menu?

You can set the display position of the on-screen menu by pressing the or button. Each time one of the buttons is pressed, the display position of the on-screen menu changes.

How do you set the display duration time for the on-screen menu?

You can set the display duration time for the on-screen menu using the Menu display duration setting. The display duration time can be set from [5 sec] to [180 sec].

How do you display/hide the on-screen display?

You can display or hide the on-screen display using the Onscreen display setting. To display the on-screen display, set the setting to [On]. To hide it, set the setting to [Off]. When the Onscreen display setting is set to On, you will see the following:

• Power on display
• Input signal switch display
• No signal display
• No external media display (at USB input)
• MUTE display after displaying the menu screen
• Off timer remaining time display when 3 minutes remaining
• Display when responding to commands from external control

How do you set the transparency rate of the on-screen display background?

You can set the transparency rate of the on-screen display background using the OSD transparency setting. The transparency can be set from 0 to 100.

How do you set whether or not to hold the cursor position on the menu screen?

You can set whether or not to hold the cursor position on the menu screen using the OSD memory setting. When this setting is set to [Off], the cursor position is not held. When it is set to [On] the cursor position is held.

Are there any notes about the OSD memory setting?

Yes, even if the OSD memory setting is set to [On], if the power of the main unit is turned off, the cursor position is not held.

What information is available in the Options menu?

The Options menu displays information about the unit and restores data to the factory default state.

Where can I find the serial number, software version and use time of the unit?

You can find the serial number, software version and use time of the unit by going to the Options submenu screen, and then going to Display information.

Where can I view the software license?

You can view the software license by going to the Options submenu screen, and then going to Software licenses.

How do you set the password for the cloning function?

You can set the password for the cloning function by going to the Options submenu screen, and then going to Cloning password. For more detail of the settings, see “Changing the cloning password”.

What is the initial password in the factory default state?

The initial password in the factory default state is [AAAA].

Are there any notes about setting the password?

Yes, there are three. Change the password periodically and set one that is difficult to guess. For the initialization method for the cloning password, consult the dealer where you purchased the product.

How do you copy the data of a single display to multiple displays by using a USB memory device or LAN?

To copy the data of a single display to multiple displays by using a USB memory device, go to the Options submenu screen and go to USB data cloning. To copy the data of a single display to multiple displays using LAN, go to the Options submenu screen and go to LAN data cloning. For more detail of the settings, see “Using data cloning”.

How do you save a log for servicing to the USB memory device?

You can save a log for servicing to the USB memory device by going to the Options submenu screen and going to Output log data.

How do you set a password to protect the settings of this unit?

To set a password to protect the settings of this unit, go to the Security password setting under the Options submenu. If you set the Security password to Off, you will disable the security password control. If you set the Security password to On, you will enable the security password control. If you choose to enable security password control, the keyboard for setting the password will be displayed. After entering the password, select [Ok]; the confirmation screen is displayed. Enter the password again and select [Ok]; the password is determined. For information on how to enter characters, see the PDF. To save the settings above in the display unit, select [Save].

What is the default password?

The default password is “1111”.

Are there any notes about the security password?

Yes, there are four. The security password is used when performing Shipping and Network settings – Reset. Change the password at a regular interval to make it hard to be guessed. For how to initialize the security password, consult your dealer.

How do you restore the data of the unit to the factory default state?

To restore the data of the unit to the factory default state, go to the Options submenu and select Shipping. For more detail of the settings, see “Shipping condition”.

How do you set each item of the function that enables control of multiple displays at the same time, or individually?

To set each item of the function that enables control of multiple displays at the same time, or individually, go to the Control settings menu.

Are there any notes about the Control settings menu?

Yes, the DIGITAL LINK related menus are displayed when the DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board is attached to the expansion slot (SLOT).

How do you select the RS232-C control terminal?

You can select the RS232-C control terminal using the Serial control setting in the Control settings submenu. To control using the SERIAL IN terminal of the display select [SERIAL IN]. To control via the function board inserted to the SLOT of this unit, select [SLOT].

How do you set the ID number when controlling the display with Controller ID function and Serial ID function?

You can set the ID number when controlling the display with Controller ID function and Serial ID function using the Display ID setting under the Control settings submenu. You can set the ID number from 0 to 100. The standard value is 0.

How do you enable/disable the Controller ID function?

You can enable or disable the Controller ID function using the Controller ID function setting under the Control settings submenu. To disable the Controller ID function, set the setting to [Off]. When you disable the Controller ID function, it can be operated as a normal remote control. To enable the Controller ID function, set the setting to [On]. This setting will take effect upon switching to [On].

Are there any notes about the Controller ID function?

Yes, there are two. To use the Controller ID function, you need to set the ID numbers both for the remote control and for the display unit. For the ID number setting for the remote control, see the PDF. About how to reset the settings to defaults, refer to “Initialization”.

How do you set external control with the PC connected to the SERIAL terminal according to the Display’s ID number?

You can control external control with the PC connected to the SERIAL terminal according to the Display’s ID number using the Serial ID function under the Control settings submenu. To disable external control by the ID, set the setting to [Off]. To enable the external control by the ID set the setting to [On].

How do you set whether to send the response command to normal commands without ID?

You can set whether to send the response command to normal commands without ID using the Serial response (Normal) setting under the Control settings submenu. If you set this setting to [Off], the display will not respond, including the inquiry command. If you set this setting to [On], the display will respond.

How do you set whether to respond to the command or not, when the serial command of ID number “0” is received?

You can set whether to respond to the command or not when the serial command of ID number “0” is received using the Serial response(ID all) setting under the Control Settings submenu. If you set this setting to [Off] the display will not respond. If you set this setting to [On] the display will respond.

How are multiple displays grouped when controlled simultaneously via serial communication?

When controlling multiple displays simultaneously via serial communication, those displays are grouped as one. You can set the group using the Serial ID group setting under the Control Settings submenu. The groups are A to G (7 groups).

How do you set whether to respond to the command or not, when the serial command, which the group is specified, is received?

You can set whether to respond to the command or not, when the serial command, which the group is specified, is received using the Serial response(ID group) setting under the Control settings submenu. If you set this setting to [Off], the display will not respond. If you set this setting to [On], the display will respond.

How do you set the first and last terminals of the daisy chain connection when serial-controlling this unit by the daisy chain connection via DIGITAL LINK?

You can set the first and last terminals of the daisy chain connection when serial-controlling this unit by the daisy chain connection via DIGITAL LINK using the Serial daisy chain position setting under the Control Settings submenu. If you are controlling this unit alone with serial control, or connecting at a position other than the first and last terminals in a daisy chain, set this setting to [—]. If you are connecting at the first terminal in a daisy chain, set this setting to [Top]. If you are connecting at the last terminal in a daisy chain, set this setting to [End].

How do you set up the informing manner for no signal or temperature rising?

You can set up the informing manner for no signal or temperature rising using the Information timing settings. With RS-232C controls, a warning or error message is sent from the display automatically. With LAN controls, you acquire the warning or error message from the display.

How do you set up the display to send out the no signal warning?

You can set up the display to send out the no signal warning using the No signal warning setting under the Information timing submenu. To send out the no signal warning, set the setting to [On].

How do you set up the detecting time for no signal warning?

You can set up the detecting time for no signal warning using the No signal warning timing setting under the Information timing submenu. The range is 01 ‒ 60, with 1-minute intervals.

How do you set up the display to send out the no signal error?

You can set up the display to send out the no signal error using the No signal error setting under the Information timing submenu. To send out the no signal error, set the setting to [On].

How do you set up the detecting time for no signal error?

You can set up the detecting time for no signal error using the No signal error timing setting under the Information timing submenu. The range is 01 ‒ 90, with 1-minute intervals.

When are the warning of No signal warning and the error of No signal error not sent?

The warning of No signal warning and the error of No signal error are not sent when the no signal state is detected through any of the following functions: No signal power off, “Power management” function for each input.

Are there any notes about the No signal error timing?

Yes, there are two. The No signal error timing cannot be set shorter than the No signal warning timing. Even when a USB memory or internal memory is connected, if there is no playable file, the unit determines that no signal is present.

How do you set up the display to send out the warning message when the temperature is rising?

You can set up the display to send out the warning message when the temperature is rising using the Temperature warning setting under the Information timing submenu. When set to [On], the display sends out the warning message.

How do you set various operations?

You can set various operations using the Mode settings.

How do you set the on-screen display orientation in the portrait setting?

You can set the on-screen display orientation in the portrait setting using the Display orientation setting under the Mode settings submenu. If you want the on-screen display angle to be for horizontal installation, set this setting to [Landscape]. If you want the on-screen display to rotate clockwise by 90 degrees for easy viewing in the portrait setting, set this setting to [Portrait].

Are there any notes about the Display orientation setting?

Yes, in the portrait setting, the power indicator shall come to the upper side.

How do you set the picture rotation in the portrait setting?

You can set the picture rotation in the portrait setting using the Image rotation setting under the Mode settings submenu. If you do not want the pictures to be rotated, set this setting to [Off]. If you want the pictures to be rotated 180 degrees, set this setting to [180 degrees].

Are there any notes about the Image rotation setting?

Yes, when Image rotation is set to [180 degrees], the adjustment direction becomes the opposite of that in the [Off] state. Note these points for adjustment.

How do you set the operation when the power button ( ) of the main unit is pressed?

You can set the operation when the power button ( ) of the main unit is pressed using the POWER button control setting under the Mode settings submenu. If you want to turn the power off when the button is pressed, set this setting to [Off]. If you want the unit to enter standby mode when the button is pressed, set this setting to [Standby].

How do you set the display operation of the power indicator of the main unit?

You can set the display operation of the power indicator of the main unit using the Power LED light-up setting under the Mode settings submenu. If you do not want the indicator to illuminate, set this setting to [Off]. If you want it to illuminate according to the power status, set this setting to [On].

How do you set the PC input mode according to the input signal format of the PC IN terminal?

You can set the PC input mode according to the input signal format of the PC IN terminal using the PC input mode setting under the Mode settings submenu. If the signal is an RGB signal, set this setting to [PC]. If the signal is a YPBPR/YCBC R signal, set the setting to [PC [YPBPR]].

Are there any notes about the PC input mode setting?

Yes, the synchronized signal supports the following inputs only. [PC]: HD/VD signal input only [PC[YPBPR]]: Only the synchronized signal superimposed on Y signal input.

How do you select a memory to use?

You can select a memory to use using the Use memory select setting under the Mode settings submenu. To use a USB memory, set the setting to [USB]. To use the internal memory, set the setting to [Internal memory].

How do you set the connection destination of the USB DEVICE terminal?

You can set the connection destination of the USB DEVICE terminal using the USB (DEVICE) connect setting under the Mode settings submenu. If you want to switch the connection destination by the input setting, set the setting to [Auto]. When this setting is set to Auto, the following will apply:

• USB-C: Connects to the USB-C HOST terminal.
• SLOT: Connects to the SLOT.
• Other inputs: Connects to the internal system of the main unit.

If you want to connect to the USB-C HOST terminal, set the setting to [USB-C]. If you want to connect to the SLOT, set the setting to [SLOT]. If you want to connect to the internal system of the main unit, set the setting to [Internal]. The same operation as that for the USB terminal is performed.

How do you control the power supply to the USB-C HOST terminal and the SLOT terminal?

You can control the power supply to the USB-C HOST terminal and the SLOT terminal using the USB-C/SLOT select setting under the Mode settings submenu. To enable a maximum power supply of 60 W to the USB-C HOST terminal, set the setting to [USB-C]. In this case, SLOT cannot be used. To use both the USB-C HOST terminal and the SLOT terminal, set the setting to [USB-C+SLOT]. Note that a maximum power supply to USB is restricted to 7.5 W.

Are there any notes about the USB-C/SLOT select setting?

Yes, when the setting is changed, turn off and on the main power switch, or disconnect and connect the power plug.

How do you select a terminal for LAN control?

You can select a terminal for LAN control using the LAN terminal setting under the Mode settings submenu. To control from the LAN terminal of the main unit, select [LAN terminal]. To control from the LAN control terminal of the DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board, select [DIGITAL LINK SLOT].

Are there any notes about selecting a terminal for LAN control?

Yes, there are two. When the DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board is not attached, the menu is not displayed, and forced control is performed by the LAN terminal of the main unit. The LAN control terminal of the DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board does not support daisy chain connection for LAN control.

How do you set various operation restrictions?

You can set various operation restrictions using the Restriction settings.

How do you enable/disable the Maximum VOL function?

You can enable or disable the Maximum VOL function using the Maximum VOL function setting under the Restriction settings submenu. If you set this setting to [Off], the sound volume level can be set up to 100 (maximum). If you set this setting to [On], the volume cannot be set to the level higher than the level set for Maximum VOL level.

How do you set the sound volume when the Maximum VOL function is enabled?

You can set the sound volume when the Maximum VOL function is enabled using the Maximum VOL level setting under the Restriction settings submenu.

Are there any notes about the Maximum VOL level setting?

Yes, there are two. The display outputs with the set volume when Maximum VOL level in the [On] state is selected on the menu. When the Maximum VOL function is switched from [Off] to [On], if the Maximum VOL level is set lower than the Initial VOL level, the Initial VOL level automatically becomes the same as the Maximum VOL level.

How do you limit operation of the buttons on the unit?

You can limit operation of the buttons on the unit using the Button lock setting under the Restriction settings submenu. If you want to be able to use all the buttons on the main unit, set this setting to [Off]. If you want to disable all button operations except for the <Main Power On / Off button>, set this setting to [On]. If you want to lock the <MENU (Unit)> and <ENTER (Unit)> buttons, set this setting to [MENU & ENTER].

How do you set the Button lock using the buttons on the unit?

You can set the Button lock using the buttons on the unit using the following procedures:

• To set Button lock to [Off]:
  • Press <+ (Unit)> for 4 times.
  • Press <INPUT (Unit)> for 4 times.
  • Press <- (Unit)> for 4 times.
  • Press <ENTER (Unit)>.
• To set Button lock to [On]:
  • Press <- (Unit)> for 4 times.
  • Press <ENTER (Unit)> for 4 times.
  • Press <+ (Unit)> for 4 times.
  • Press <ENTER (Unit)>.
• To set Button lock to [MENU & ENTER]:
  • Press <ENTER (Unit)> for 4 times.
  • Press <+ (Unit)> for 4 times.
  • Press <INPUT (Unit)> for 4 times.
  • Press <ENTER (Unit)>.

Are there any notes about setting the Button lock?

Yes, for information about how to reset the settings to defaults, refer to “Initialization”.

How do you set the lock setting for the display <Main Power On / Off button>?

You can set the lock setting for the display <Main Power On / Off button> using the POWER button lock setting under the Restriction settings submenu. If you want to enable the <Main Power On / Off button> operation, set this setting to [Off]. If you want to disable the <Main Power On / Off button> operation, set this setting to [On].

How do you limit operation of the buttons on the remote control?

You can limit operation of the buttons on the remote control using the Controller user level setting under the Restriction settings submenu. If you want to be able to use all of the buttons on the remote control, set this setting to [Off]. If you only want to be able to use <Standby (ON/OFF) button>, <INPUT>, <RECALL>, <MUTE>, <VOL +> and <VOL -> buttons on the remote control, set this setting to [User1]. If you only want to be able to use the <Standby (ON/OFF) button> on the remote control, set this setting to [User2]. If you want to lock all the buttons on the remote control, set this setting to [User3].

Are there any notes about limiting operation of the buttons on the remote control?

Yes, for information about how to reset the settings to defaults, refer to “Initialization”.

How do you set settings for the SLOT?

You can set the settings for the SLOT using the SLOT settings menu. This menu is displayed only when a function board is inserted into the SLOT.

How do you view the information of the function board inserted into the SLOT?

You can view the information of the function board inserted into the SLOT by going to the SLOT settings submenu and selecting SLOT information.

How do you link the power operation of the SLOT with the power operation of the unit?

You can link the power operation of the SLOT with the power operation of the unit using the SLOT power link setting in the SLOT settings submenu. If you do not want to link them, set this setting to [Off]. If you want the power of the unit to be turned off when the power of the inserted function board is turned off during SLOT input or enters the power save mode, set this setting to [On]. After that, when the power of the function board is turned on or returns from the power save mode, the power of the unit is turned on.

Are there any notes about the SLOT power link setting?

Yes, there are two. When HDMI-CEC control is set to Enable, this menu will be grayed out and cannot be set. When the DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board is attached, SLOT power link is grayed out and cannot be set.

How do you set the power supply status for the SLOT when the unit is in standby mode?

You can set the power supply status for the SLOT when the unit is in standby mode using the SLOT standby setting under the SLOT settings submenu. If you do not want the power to be supplied to the SLOT when the power is turned off by the remote control, etc., set this setting to [Off]. If you want the power to be supplied to the SLOT when the power is turned off by the remote control, etc., set this setting to [On].

Are there any notes about the SLOT standby setting?

Yes, there are three. When SLOT standby is set to [On], the power indicator in standby mode lights purple. When HDMI-CEC control is set to Enable, this menu will be grayed out and cannot be set. When the DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board is used, set SLOT standby to [On].

How do you start up the power of the SLOT?

To start up the power of the SLOT, go to the SLOT settings submenu and select SLOT power on.

How do you forcibly turn off the power of the SLOT?

You can forcibly turn off the power of the SLOT using the SLOT forced termination setting under the SLOT settings submenu. Use this only when the power cannot be turned off manually due to the problem of the operating system, etc.

What do you need to do to control the display connected to the network using your computer?

The unit has a network function and you can control the Display connected to the network using your computer. To do this, first confirm that your computer has a wired LAN. Before connecting the Display to the computer, be sure to check the following settings:

• Check 1: About LAN cable
  • Connect the cable properly.
  • Use a LAN cable that is compatible with category 5e or above.
• Check 2: Wired LAN settings
  • Computer with a built-in wired LAN function
    • Switch on the wired LAN.
  • Computer without a built-in wired LAN function
    • Check that your wired LAN adapter is recognized properly and that it is switched on.
    • Install the wired LAN adapter driver beforehand. For details on how to install the driver, refer to the instructions accompanying the wired LAN adapter.

What is needed to use WEB control?

A web browser is needed to use WEB control. The compatible OS are Windows and Mac OS. The compatible web browsers are Internet Explorer 11.0, Microsoft Edge (Windows) Safari 10.0/ 11.0/12.0/13.0/14.0 (Mac OS).

How do you connect the display to the network?

To connect the display to the network, connect a commercially available LAN cable to the LAN terminal on the back of the display and to your PC. Then connect the other end of the LAN cable to a hub or broadband router.

Are there any notes about connecting the display to the network?

Yes, there are five notes about connecting the display to the network.

• For LAN cable, use shielded cable, otherwise picture noise may be caused.
• Make sure the broadband router or hub supports 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX.
• Touching the LAN Terminal with a statically charged hand (body) may cause damage to the device due to its discharge. Do not touch the LAN Terminal or the metal part of the LAN cable.
• For instructions on connection, consult your network administrator.

What commands are supported by the command control?

The command control network function can control the unit in the same way as serial control from a network. Commands used in the serial control are supported.

The communication differs whether [Setup] – [Network settings] – [LAN control protocol] is set to [Protocol 1] or [Protocol 2].

When [LAN control protocol] is set to [Protocol 1], how does it communicate?

It communicates using the display-specific protocol.

What is Connection method 1?

Obtain the display’s IP address and the port number (Default is 1024), and request connection to the display.

Where can the IP address and the port number be obtained from?

The IP address and the port number can be obtained from the following menus:

• IP address: [Setup] → [Network settings] → [LAN setup] or [Network status]
• Port number: [Setup] → [Network settings] → [LAN setup]

How does the display respond?

Response data

Data part	Space	Mode	Space	Random number part	Last terminal symbol
[PDPCONTROL]	[ ]	\	[ ]	[zzzzzzzz]	(CR) 0x0d
(ASCII character string)	0x20	0x31	0x20	(ASCII code hex number)
10 bytes	1 byte	1 byte	1 byte	8 bytes	1 byte

Mode: 1 = Protect mode

How do you generate a 32-byte hash value?

Hash the following data with the MD5 algorithm, and generate a 32-byte hash value. [zzzzzzzzyyyyy]

• zzzzzzzz : 8-byte random number obtained in step 2
• yyyyy : Password set for [Administrator account settings]

What is the command transmission method?

Transmit in the following command format Transmitted data

Header	Control symbol	Data part	Control symbol	Last terminal symbol
Hash value (see “Connection method”)	(STX) 0x02		(ETX) 0x03	(CR) 0x0d
32 bytes	1 byte	Undefined	1 byte	1 byte

Control symbol	Data part	Control symbol	Last terminal symbol
(STX) 0x02		(ETX) 0x03	(CR) 0x0d
1 byte	Undefined	1 byte	1 byte

What are the error responses?

Error message Last terminal symbol

• “ERR1” : Undefined control command (CR) 0x0d
• “ERR2” : Out of parameter range
• “ERR3” : Busy status or reception invalid period
• “ERR4” : Timeout or reception invalid period
• “ERR5” : Wrong data length
• “PDPCONTROL ERRA” : Mismatching of password
• 4 bytes or 15 bytes 1 byte

When [LAN control protocol] is set to [Protocol 2], how does it communicate?

It communicates with the same protocol as that of a Panasonic projector.

What is Connection method 1?

Obtain the display’s IP address and the port number (Default is 1024), and request connection to the display.

Where can the IP address and the port number be obtained from?

The IP address and the port number can be obtained from the following menus:

• IP address: [Setup] → [Network settings] → [LAN setup] or [Network status]
• Port number: [Setup] → [Network settings] → [LAN setup]

How does the display respond?

Response data

Data part	Space	Mode	Space	Random number part	Last terminal symbol
[NTCONTROL]	[ ]	\	[ ]	[zzzzzzzz]	(CR) 0x0d
(ASCII character string)	0x20	0x31	0x20	(ASCII code hex number)
9 bytes	1 byte	1 byte	1 byte	8 bytes	1 byte

Mode: 1 = Protect mode

How do you generate a 32-byte hash value?

Hash the following data with the MD5 algorithm, and generate a 32-byte hash value. [xxxxxx:yyyyy:zzzzzzzz]

• xxxxxx : User name set for [Administrator account settings]
• yyyyy : Password set for the above [Administrator account settings]
• zzzzzzzz : 8-byte random number obtained in step 2

What is the command transmission format?

Transmitted data

Header	Data part	Last terminal symbol
Hash value (see “Connection method”)		(CR) 0x0d
32 bytes	Undefined	1 byte

Received data

Header	Data part	Last terminal symbol
‘0’ 0x30		(CR) 0x0d
1 byte	Undefined	1 byte

What are the error responses?

Error message Last terminal symbol

• “ERR1” : Undefined control command (CR) 0x0d
• “ERR2” : Out of parameter range
• “ERR3” : Busy status or reception invalid period
• “ERR4” : Timeout or reception invalid period
• “ERR5” : Wrong data length
• “ERRA” : Mismatching of password
• 4 bytes 1 byte

Note: With some of the commands, a part of the character string of the transmitted data may not be included in the received data.

Is the unit’s network function compatible with PJLink?

Yes. The unit’s Network function is compatible with PJLink Class 1 and Class 2.

What operations can be performed from a computer when PJLink protocol is used?

The following operations can be performed from a computer when PJLink protocol is used:

• Setting the Display
• Querying the Display status

What are the supported commands for PJLink protocol?

The commands to control the unit with PJLink protocol are as follows.

Class	Command	Control
1	POWR	Power control<br>0: Standby<br>1: Power On
1	POWR?	Power status query<br>0: Standby<br>1: Power On
1,2	INPT	Input switch * Refer to INST? parameters.
1,2	INPT?	Input switch query * Refer to INST? parameters.
1	AVMT	Shutter control<br>10: Picture On (picture mute deactivated)<br>11: Picture Off (picture on mute)<br>20: Audio On (audio mute deactivated)<br>21: Audio Off (audio on mute)<br>30: Shutter mode Off (picture and audio mute deactivated)<br>31: Shutter mode On (picture and audio on mute)
1	AVMT?	Shutter control query<br>11: Picture Off (picture on mute)<br>21: Audio Off (audio on mute)<br>30: Shutter mode Off (picture and audio mute deactivated)<br>31: Shutter mode On (picture and audio on mute)
1	ERST?	Error status query<br>First byte: 0<br>Second byte: 0<br>Third byte: 0<br>Fourth byte: 0<br>Fifth byte: 0<br>Sixth byte: Other error. 0 or 2.<br>* Meaning of 0, 2.<br>0: Error is not detected, 2: Error
1,2	INST?	Input switch list query<br>11: PC IN input (PC / PC [YPBPR])<br>31: HDMI IN 1 input (HDMI1)<br>32: HDMI IN 2 input (HDMI2)<br>33: HDMI IN 3 input (HDMI3)<br>34: USB-C HOST input (USB-C)<br>35: SLOT input (SLOT)<br>36: WHITEBOARD input (WHITEBOARD)<br>41: USB / Internal Memory input (USB / Internal memory)<br>42: MEMORY VIEWER input (MEMORY VIEWER)<br>51: Screen Transfer input (Screen Transfer)
1	NAME?	Display name query The name selected in [Display name] is returned.
1	INF1?	Manufacturer name query Returns “Panasonic”.
1	INF2?	Model name query Returns “55EQ2W”. (Example: 55-inch EQ2W model)
1	INFO?	Other information query Returns version number.
1	CLSS?	Class information query Returns “2”.
2	SNUM?	Serial number query Returns the serial number.
2	SVER?	Software version query Returns the version number.
2	INNM?	Input terminal name query Returns the input terminal name.<br>11: PC<br>31: HDMI1<br>32: HDMI2<br>33: HDMI3<br>34: USB-C<br>35: SLOT<br>36: WHITEBOARD<br>41: USB / Internal Memory<br>42: MEMORY VIEWER<br>51: Screen Transfer
2	IRES ?	Input signal resolution query Returns the input signal resolution.
2	RRES ?	Recommended resolution query Returns “3840×2160”.
2	SVOL	Speaker volume<br>0: Turns down the volume.<br>1: Turns up the volume.
2	LKUP	Linkup notification Notifies the MAC address when PJLink communication is available.
2	SRCH	Display search A device that is connected on the same network and can perform PJLink class 2 communication returns the MAC address.

Where do you set the password used for PJLink?

Set the password used for PJLink in [PJLink settings] – [Password]. When using PJLink without security authorization, set use without the password (field blank).

What is “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”?

This unit supports the early warning software “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” which monitors and controls devices (projectors or displays) connected to an intranet, and detects signs of abnormality of such devices that may arise in future.

How many devices can be registered to monitor with the early warning function?

As for the early warning function, the maximum number of devices that can be registered to monitor differs according to the type of license. Up to 2 048 devices can be registered for free for a maximum of 90 days after the installation to the computer has completed.

What is Video Wall Manager?

This unit supports the “Video Wall Manager” software which adjusts multiple displays simultaneously or separately on one computer without rearranging cables.

Note: This unit does not support the Auto Display Adjustment Upgrade Kit (TY-VUK10).

What is Content Management Software?

This unit supports “Content Management Software” to create schedule data on a PC required to play back still pictures and motion pictures. (Supports Ver.3.0 or later.)

What is Screen Transfer?

This unit supports the software [Screen Transfer] that sends the PC screen to the display via wired LAN. [Screen Transfer] can be downloaded from [Download] for the Web browser control.

How do you connect with LAN?

Note: To use the network function, set each item in [Network settings] and be sure to set [Network control] to [On].

Computer operation

1. Turn on the computer.

2. Make the network setting according to your system administrator. When the Display settings are the default settings, the computer can be used with the following network settings.

   • IP address 192.168.0.9
   • Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
   • Gateway 192.168.0.1

How do you use the web browser control?

You can use a Web browser to control the unit and set up a network and password.

Before Using Web Browser Control

To use the Web browser control, the unit and computer set ups are required.

About Web Browser

Set each item in [Network settings] and be sure to set [Network control] to [On].

Note: Even if the setting is set to [Off], the Web browser control screens that do not control this unit (display information [Status], detailed settings [Detailed set up] and password change [Change password]) operate.

Computer Setup

Disable the proxy server settings and enable JavaScript.

Note: The setting procedure differs depending on the software version. Please refer to the description in HELP, etc. of the software.

(Windows)

Windows 10 is used as an example.

How do you disable proxy server settings in Windows?

1. Display [Internet Properties] window. Click [Start] → [Settings] → [Network & Internet] → [Ethernet] → [Network and Sharing Center] → [Internet Options].
2. Click the [Connections] tab and then [LAN Settings].
3. Deselect the [Use automatic configuration script] and [Use a proxy server for your LAN] boxes.
4. Click [OK].

How do you enable JavaScript in Windows?

1. Display [Internet Properties] window. Click [Start] → [Settings] → [Network & Internet] → [Ethernet] → [Network and Sharing Center] → [Internet Options].
2. Set the security level on the [Security] tab to [Default Level]. Alternatively, enable [Active scripting] from the [Custom Level] button.

(Mac)

How do you disable proxy server settings in Mac?

1. From the [Safari] menu, click [Preferences]. General screen is displayed.
2. From the [Advanced] tab, click the [Change Settings…] button next to [Proxies]. Click [Proxies] and set up a proxy server.
3. Deselect the [Automatic Proxy Configuration] and [Web Proxy (HTTP)] and [Secure Web Proxy (HTTPS)] boxes.
4. Click [Apply Now].

How do you enable JavaScript in Mac?

1. Display [Security] of Safari.
2. Select [Enable JavaScript] under [Web content].

How do you access from the web browser?

Access to the TOP screen of the Web browser control using a Web browser.

1. Start your Web browser.
2. Enter the IP address set with the [LAN setup] of the unit. When the user name and password have been set in [Administrator account settings] or with the WEB control function, proceed to step 3. When they have not been set and the WEB control function is used for the first time, proceed to step 4. Do the same in the case of user privileges.
3. Enter the user name and password when the Authentication screen is displayed. Proceed to step 7. When the password has not been set with the user privileges, click [OK] and proceed to step 4. Change User name / Password page is displayed.
   • For [Administrator] Enter the new user name and password, and then click [Change]. The screen of step 3 is displayed again. Enter the new user name and password.
   • For [User] Enter the new user name and password set in step 5.
4. Click [OK].

Note:

• The password used here is common to the password specified in [Network settings] – [Administrator account settings].
• The default settings are as described below:
  • Administrator privilege Specify the user name and password you set for [Administrator account settings].
  • User permission User name: dispuser Password: None Change the password first.
• When [Reset] for [Network settings] of this unit is executed, the password change is also required after log-in.
• The password can be changed on the Password Setup screen after logging in. The user name can be changed when connecting by logging in with administrator privileges.
• If a wrong user name/password is entered 3 times when you log in, the field will be locked for several minutes.
• When using [Detailed set up], log in with the administrator rights.
• Depending on the browser, displayed operations may change.

What is the description of each section?

• Page tab Click these to switch pages.
  • [Status] Click this item, and the status of the Display is displayed.
  • [Display control] Click this item to display the Display control page.
  • [Detailed set up] Click this item to display the advanced settings page.
  • [Change password]
  • [Download] Click this item to display the page to download the dedicated application, [Screen Transfer].
  • [Browser Remote Control] Click this item to display the Browser Remote Control on the WEB browser, which is the same as the supplied remote control.

What does the Display status page display?

It displays the display status. Click [Status] → [Display status].

• Display type Displays the type of Display.
• Firmware version Displays the firmware version of the display.

What does the Network status page display?

It displays the current configuration information of the network. Click [Status] → [Network Status].

• Wired LAN Displays the configuration details of wired LAN.

What does the Input information page display?

It displays the input information of this unit. Click [Status] → [Input status].

• Input terminal Displays the information of the input terminal.
• Input signal Displays the information of the input signal.

Note:

• If an input is other than USB/Internal Memory input or MEMORY VIEWER input, the name of the input signal is displayed.
• In the case of USB/Internal Memory input and MEMORY VIEWER input, the name of the file being played is displayed.
• [—-] is displayed in standby mode.

What can be performed on the Basic control page?

The basic operations of the unit can be performed. Click [Display control] → [Basic control].

• Power On/Off control
• Input select Use these to select the input signals
• AUDIO mute
• Aspect Switches aspect mode

What can be performed on the Detail control page?

The detailed functions of the unit can be performed. Click [Display control] → [Advanced control].

• Enter a command. Use the same command used for the serial control. Response from the unit is displayed.
• Run Command is sent and run.

Note: After the settings are changed, it may take a while until the display status is displayed.

What can be performed on the Detailed set up page?

When connecting by logging in with administrator privileges, you can make detailed settings for network related to display.

How do you access the LAN settings page?

1. Click [Detailed set up] in the menu.

2. Click [Next]. The settings window appears, showing the current settings.

   • To change the LAN settings, click [Change].
   • To return to the previous window, click [Back].

3. Complete the detailed settings and click [Next]. In this window, DNS server and HOST NAME (up to 20 characters) settings can be made as well as address information set on the [LAN setup] menu of the display. After all required items have been entered, click [Next]. Then, a confirmation window appears when [EAP] is set to [NONE]. When [EAP] is set to items other than [NONE], the next page appears.

Note:

• When [DHCP ON] is set, if the DNS server address is acquired from the DHCP server, the acquired address is valid.

What can you do when [EAP] is set to items other than [NONE] or [EAP-TLS]?

• [USER NAME] Enter the user name for authentication with one-byte alphanumeric characters (excluding space). (Up to 64 characters)
• [PASSWORD] Enter the password for authentication with one-byte alphanumeric characters. (Up to 64 characters)
• [Back], [Next] Click [Back] to return to the previous screen. Click [Next] to display the screen to confirm the setting contents.

What can you do when [EAP] is set to [EAP-TLS]?

• Register the electronic certificate (extension: PFX) for authentication.
• [CA CERTIFICATE] Register the CA certificate (extension: CER) for authentication.

Note: When [EAP] is [EAP-TLS], date and time need to be set on the adjust clock page.

How do you register the settings?

Click [Submit]. The settings will be registered.

Note: Changing the setting of LAN while connected with LAN might disconnect the connection.

What can you set on the Adjust clock page?

It sets the clock-related items of this unit. Click [Detailed set up] → [Adjust clock].

• Time zone selection field
• Time zone setting refresh button
• Display synchronization selection field
• Parent/Child selection field for display synchronization
• Display synchronization setting refresh button
• NTP synchronization selection field
• NTP server input field (When setting date and time with NTP synchronization, enter the IP address or server name. To enter the server name, setting the DNS server is required.)
• Date entry field
• Time entry field
• NTP synchronization setting and date setting refresh button

Note:

• Date and time is displayed as [- -] when they are not set.
• When [Network control] is set to [On] and it is in standby mode, date and time display will be blank and they cannot be set. [Time zone], [Synchronize display] and [NTP synchronization] cannot be set as well.
• When [SYNCHRONIZE DISPLAY] is set to [ON] / [CHILD], it is not possible to set [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION], [Date] or [Time].
• When [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is set to [ON] , it is not possible to set [Date] or [Time].
• If the time becomes incorrect immediately after setting the correct time, contact the dealer where you bought the Display.
• [NTP synchronization] operates only in power-on state or in schedule standby state.

What does the Ping test page do?

This page makes it possible to check whether the network is connected to the DNS server, etc. Click [Detailed set up] → [Ping test].

• Enter the IP address of the server to be tested.
• Button for conducting the test
• Display which appears when the connection was successful.
• Display which appears when the connection failed.

How do you set the port number?

Set the port number to be used with command control. Click [Detailed set up] → [Command port set up].

• Input the port number to be used with command control.
• Setting update button.

What does the Status notification set up page do?

It sets the IP address and port number of the PC where “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” is operating when informing the PC of the status of this unit. Click [Detailed set up] → [Status notification set up]. When the status notification is set, if the unit is malfunctioning and its power indicator is blinking orange, the trouble content can be recognized even at a remote location where the power indicator cannot be directly checked.

• Selection field of status notification
• IP address input field for notification destination PC
• Port number input field for notification destination PC
• Update button for the settings

What does the SNMP setup page do?

It sets the various items for SNMP. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a protocol to manage devices connected to the network. If the SNMP manager is used for connection, the information of the target device can be obtained, and its settings can be changed. Click [Detailed set up] → [SNMP set up].

• [SNMP]: Select the SNMP version to use. [SNMP v1/v2c]
• [COMMUNITY] [COMMUNITY NAME]: Enter the community name of SNMP v1/v2c. [PERMISSION]: Select whether to obtain only information via SNMP v1/v2c or to both obtain information and make the setting.
• [SNMP v3] [USER] [USER NAME]: Enter the user name of SNMP v3. [PERMISSION]: Select whether to obtain only information via SNMP v3 or to both obtain information and make the setting. [SECURITY LEVEL]: Select the security level for SNMP v3. [AUTHENTICATION PROTOCOL]: Select the authentication method for SNMP v3 from SHA1 and MD5. [AUTHENTICATION PASSWORD]: Set the authentication password of SNMP v3. [PRIVACY PROTOCOL]: Select the encryption method for SNMP v3 from AES and DES. [PRIVACY PASSWORD]: Set the encryption password of SNMP v3.

How do I select the SNMP version to use when sending TRAP?

Select the SNMP version to use when sending TRAP in the [TRAP] section.

How do I select the COMMUNITY/USER to use when sending TRAP?

Select COMMUNITY/USER to use when sending TRAP in the [COMMUNITY/USER] section. When SNMP v1/v2c is selected as the SNMP version of TRAP, the COMMUNITY 1/2 setting is used. When SNMP v3 is selected, the USER1/2 setting is used.

How do I set the IP address of the SNMP manager that gives notice of TRAP?

Set the IP address of the SNMP manager that gives notice of TRAP in the [TRAP ADDRESS] – [ADDRESS] section.

How do I set the TRAP reception port number of the SNMP manager that gives notice of TRAP?

Set the TRAP reception port number of the SNMP manager that gives notice of TRAP in the [TRAP ADDRESS] – [PORT] section.

When is TRAP sent if the [POWER] option is selected in [TRAP OPTIONS]?

TRAP is sent if the unit enters the standby mode by “Power management”, [No signal power off] or [No activity power off].

When is TRAP sent if [NO SIGNAL] is set to [ENABLE(5min)]?

TRAP is sent if no-signal continues for 5 minutes.

When is TRAP sent if [NO SIGNAL] is set to [ENABLE(No signal error timing)]?

TRAP is sent if no-signal error set with [Setup] – [Information timing] occurs.

When is TRAP sent if the [TEMPERATURE] option is selected in [TRAP OPTIONS]?

TRAP is sent if the temperature error occurs.

When is TRAP sent if the [AUTHENTICATION] option is selected in [TRAP OPTIONS]?

TRAP is sent if the SNMP authentication fails.

When is TRAP sent if the [FATAL SHUTDOWN] option is selected in [TRAP OPTIONS]?

TRAP is sent if a fatal error that requires the power to be forcibly turned off occurs. However, all fatal errors do not necessarily support TRAP.

What is the maximum number of characters that can be used for a community name?

The maximum number of characters that can be used for a community name is 32 with one-byte alphanumeric characters.

What is the maximum number of characters that can be used for a user name and password?

The maximum number of characters that can be used for a user name and password is 32 with one-byte alphanumeric characters. Note that the password must be set with 8 characters or more.

What is the recommended frequency for changing passwords?

Change the password periodically, and set one that is difficult to guess.

What should I do with the SNMP manager in the system configuration?

The SNMP manager must be operating in the system configuration used.

Where can I find the MIB (Management Information Base) of this unit?

See the web site below for the MIB (Management Information Base) of this unit. https://panasonic.net/cns/prodisplays

How do I set the password?

Click [Change password].

What are the different account types I can select when setting the password?

Select [Administrator]. Select [User]. Select [PJLink].

What are the steps for changing the password for an Administrator account?

1. Account
2. Current user name input field
3. Current password input field
4. New user name input field
5. New password input field
6. New password input field (re-enter for confirmation)
7. Button for executing password change

What happens if the unit has already been registered to application software that uses communication control via LAN and the “Administrator” user name or password is changed?

If this unit has already been registered to application software such as “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” that uses communication control via LAN, changing an “Administrator” user name or password will disable the communication with this unit. If the “Administrator” user name or password is changed, update the registration information of applicable application software.

What are the steps for changing the password for a User account?

1. Account
2. New user name input field
3. New password input field
4. New password input field (re-enter for confirmation)
5. Button for executing password change

What are the steps for changing the password for a user?

1. Current password input field
2. New password input field
3. New password input field (re-enter for confirmation)
4. Button for executing password change

What characters can be used for a user name?

Alphanumeric characters can be used for a user name.

What is the maximum number of characters that can be used for a user name and a password?

Up to 16 characters can be used for a user name and a password.

What is required when changing the administrator account?

When changing the administrator account, both “current user name” and “current password” are required.

What is recommended when logging in with administrator privileges and changing the account?

It is recommended not to use the current user name/password or default values for a new user name/password.

What is recommended when logging in with user privileges and changing the password?

It is recommended not to use the current password or default value for a new password.

What is recommended in terms of password complexity?

The following are recommendations in complexity when changing passwords. (For both administrator privileges and user privileges) Include at least 3 kinds of characters from the following 4, and the number of characters should be 8 or more.

• Alphabet upper case character (A to Z)
• Alphabet lower case character (a to z)
• Number (0 to 9)
• Special character (~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + | } { [ ] < > . , / ? ‘, etc.) It is recommended to set the password using the above types of characters without leaving the password field blank.

What is the only thing you have to set for PJLink?

You have to set only the password for PJLink.

What is the maximum number of characters that can be used for a PJLink password?

Up to 16 characters can be used for a password.

What is recommended when logging in with user privileges and changing the PJLink password?

It is recommended not to use the current password or default value for a new password.

What is the purpose of the CRT (Certificate) key?

To perform the HTTPS communication or use the control system or application software of Crestron Electronics, Inc., it is necessary to install the certificate for authentication into the Display. Click [Detailed set up] → [Certificate]. [CRT Key generate] Generates the CRT (Certificate) key. The page to generate the CRT key is displayed by clicking [Execute].

What happens when I click [Execute] on the [CRT Key generate] page?

The page to generate the CRT key is displayed by clicking [Execute].

What is a self-signed certificate?

The self-signed certificate is generated by the Display. The page to generate the self-signed certificate is displayed by clicking [Execute] in the [Self-signed Certificate] – [Generate] section.

What does it mean when the [Information] status of the self-signed certificate is [Not generated]?

Self-signed certificate is not generated.

What does it mean when the [Information] status of the self-signed certificate is [(host name)]?

Self-signed certificate is generated and valid. The host name registered in the self-signed certificate is displayed.

What does it mean when the [Information] status of the self-signed certificate is [Invalid (Reason: Server Certificate installed)]?

The server certificate is valid, so the generated self-signed certificate is invalid.

Where can I find information about the generated self-signed certificate?

Information of the generated self-signed certificate is displayed by clicking [Confirm].

How do I delete the generated self-signed certificate?

The generated self-signed certificate can be deleted by clicking [Delete].

What is a signing request?

The signing request (Generate Certificate Signing Request) is generated by clicking [Execute] in the [Server Certificate] – [Generate Certificate Signing Request] section.

How do I install the server certificate and the intermediate certificate?

The certificate is installed into the Display by specifying the certificate file and clicking [Execute] in the [Server Certificate] – [Server Certificate install]/[Intermediate Certificate install] section.

What does it mean when the [Information] status of the server certificate is [Invalid]?

The server certificate is not installed. Or, the current CRT key is different from the CRT key used for requesting the installed server certificate.

What does it mean when the [Information] status of the server certificate is [(host name)]?

The server certificate is installed and valid. The host name registered in the server certificate is displayed.

What does it mean when the [Information] status of the server certificate is [Expired]?

The valid period of the server certificate has expired.

Where can I find the host name registered in the server certificate?

The host name registered in the server certificate is displayed when the server certificate is installed and valid.

Where can I find information of the installed server certificate?

Information of the installed server certificate is displayed by clicking [Confirm].

How do I delete the installed server certificate and the intermediate certificate?

The installed server certificate and the intermediate certificate can be deleted by clicking [Delete].

What are the steps for setting the security certificate?

The flow for setting differs depending on which certificate is to be used as the security certificate, either the server certificate or the self-signed certificate.

• Generate the CRT key.
• Select the connection method.
• Set the HTTPS port number.
• Click [Set].

What are the steps for setting the server certificate?

• Generate the signing request.
• Acquire the server certificate.
• Install the certificate.

What are the steps for setting the self-signed certificate?

• Generate the self-signed certificate.

What is the procedure for applying for a server certificate from a certification organization?

When using the server certificate, the procedure from application to the certification organization to issuing of the server certificate is required to be performed between the customer and the certification organization. For the application method, etc., contact the certification organization.

What is the CRT key?

Generate the CRT key used for encryption with the RSA (Rivest-Shamir-Adleman cryptosystem) public key encryption method. CRT key is a type of the private key.

How do I generate the CRT key?

1. Click [Certificate] → [CRT Key generate] → [Execute]. The page to generate the CRT key is displayed.
2. Click [Execute].

What message is displayed after the CRT is generated for the first time?

“CRT key – Generated”

What message is displayed after the CRT is generated for the second time or later?

“The CRT key will be generated. In updating the CRT key, the Server Certificate corresponds to the current CRT key will become unavailable. Continue?”

How do I proceed after clicking [OK] on the message that appears when generating the CRT key for the second time or later?

CRT key will be generated and the following message will be displayed. “CRT key – Generated”

How do I confirm the key length and generation date and time of the current CRT key?

Clicking [Certificate] → [CRT Key generate] → [Execute] again can confirm the key length and generation date and time of the current CRT key with the [RSA key size] and [Last modified] of [Current CRT key] at the upper row of the CRT key generation page.

What does it mean when [Not generated] is displayed in [Last modified]?

[Not generated] displayed in [Last modified] indicates that the CRT has not been generated.

What is the [RSA key size]?

[RSA key size] is fixed to [2048bit]. The server certificate may not be issued depending on the certification organization to apply if the key length is 2048-bit.

How long does it take to generate the CRT key?

Generation of the CRT key may take up to approximately two minutes.

What should I do when the CRT key is updated?

When the CRT key is updated, apply for the server certificate or generate the self-signed certificate again using that CRT key. A certificate linked to the CRT key is required.

Is it possible to return to the previously generated CRT key information?

Previously generated CRT key information is saved even if the CRT key is updated. To return to the previous CRT key, refer to “Cancelling the update of the CRT key”.

How many times is it possible to return to the previously generated CRT key?

It is possible to return to the previously generated CRT key only once even if the CRT key is updated.

How do I cancel the update of the CRT key?

1. Click [Certificate] → [CRT Key generate] → [Execute]. The page to generate the CRT key is displayed.
2. Click [History].
3. Confirm [RSA key size] and [Last modified] of the CRT key to restore.
4. Click [Apply].

What message is displayed after clicking [Apply] when cancelling the update of the CRT key?

“The previous CRT key will be loaded. Please generate Self-signed Certificate or install the Server Certificate corresponds to the CRT key. Continue?”

What happens after clicking [OK] on the message that appears after clicking [Apply] when cancelling the update of the CRT key?

Previously generated CRT key is reflected as the current CRT key.

What is required when returning to the previously generated CRT key?

When returned to the previously generated CRT key, a certificate linked to that CRT key is required.

When should I generate a signing request?

When using the server certificate issued by the certification organization as a security certificate, generate a signing request necessary for application of issuing to the certification organization. Generate the signing request after generating the CRT key.

How do I generate a signing request?

1. Click [Certificate] → [Generate Certificate Signing Request] → [Execute]. The page to generate the signing request is displayed.
2. Enter the information required for application. The details of each item are as follows. Enter the information following the requirement of the certification organization to apply.

What information is required for the signing request application?

• [Common Name]: Enter the Display name or the IP address set in the Display. (664 character limit)
• [Country]: Enter the country code defined in ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 (two upper case alphabets).
• [State]: Enter the State, etc. (128 character limit)
• [Locality]: Enter the locality. (128 character limit)
• [Organization]: Enter the organization name. (64 character limit)
• [Organization Unit]: Enter the organization unit name. (64 character limit)
• [CRT key] – [RSA key size]: The key length of the current CRT key is displayed.
• [CRT key] – [Last modified]: The generation date and time of the current CRT key is displayed.

What happens after clicking [OK] in the signing request page?

The signing request file is generated. Enter a file name and save the file in the desired folder.

How do I save the signing request file?

Enter a file name and click [Save]. The file for signing request is saved in the specified folder.

What characters can be inputted for the signing request?

The characters that can be input are as follows:

• Single-byte numbers: 0 to 9
• Single-byte alphabets: A to Z, a to z
• Single-byte symbols: – . _ , + / ( )

What format is the signing request generated by the Display?

The signing request generated by the Display is PEM format (file extension: pem).

How do I apply for the issuing of the server certificate to the certification organization?

Apply issuing of the server certificate to the certification organization using the saved signing request file (PEM format).

How do I install the server certificate and the intermediate certificate?

1. Install the server certificate and the intermediate certificate issued by the certification organization into the Display. Click [Generate] → [Server Certificate install] → [Browse]. A dialog to select the file is displayed.
2. Select the server certificate file and click [Open]. If the intermediate certificate is issued from the certification organization together with the server certificate, proceed to Step 3). If only the server certificate is issued from the certification organization, proceed to Step 5).
3. Click [Browse] in [Intermediate Certificate install]. A dialog to select the file is displayed.
4. Select the intermediate certificate file and click [Open].
5. Click [Execute]. The server certificate and the intermediate certificate are installed into the Display.
6. Click [OK].

How do I confirm the information of the installed server certificate?

To confirm the information of the installed server certificate, refer to “Confirming the information of the server certificate”.

How do I confirm the information of the server certificate installed in the Display?

Click [Certificate] → [Server Certificate] → [Information] → [Confirm]. The information of the installed server certificate is displayed.

What information is displayed when confirming the information of the server certificate?

• [Common Name]: The Display name or the IP address is displayed.
• [Country]: The country code defined in ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 (two upper case alphabets) is displayed.
• [State]: The State, etc. is displayed.
• [Locality]: The locality is displayed.
• [Organization]: The organization name is displayed.
• [Organization Unit]: The organization unit name is not displayed. It is displayed as an asterisk.
• [Not Before]: Displays the date and time that the self-signed certificate was issued.
• [Not After]: Displays the date and time that the self-signed certificate will expire.
• [CRT key] – [RSA key size]: The key length of the CRT key is displayed.
• [CRT key] – [Last modified]: The generation date and time of the CRT key is displayed.

How do I delete the installed server certificate and the intermediate certificate?

The installed server certificate and the intermediate certificate can be deleted by clicking [Certificate] → [Server Certificate] → [Delete]. However, it cannot be deleted when [HTTPS set up] → [Connection] is set to [HTTPS]. Delete it after changing the setting to perform the HTTP communication.

What should I do before deleting the server certificate within the valid period?

To delete the server certificate within the valid period, confirm that the certificate file used for installing is available on hand. It will be necessary when installing the server certificate again.

When can I use the self-signed certificate generated in the Display?

When the server certificate issued by the certification organization is not to be used as the security certificate, it is possible to use the self-signed certificate generated in the Display. Generate the self-signed certificate after generating the CRT key.

How do I generate the self-signed certificate?

1. Click [Certificate] → [Self-signed Certificate] → [Generate] → [Execute]. The page to generate the self-signed certificate is displayed.
2. Enter the information required for generation. The details of each item are as follows.

What information is required for generating the self-signed certificate?

• [Common Name]: Enter the Display name or the IP address set in the Display. (64 character limit)
• [Country]: Enter the country code defined in ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 (two upper case alphabets).
• [State]: Enter the State, etc. (128 character limit)
• [Locality]: Enter the locality. (128 character limit)
• [Organization]: Enter the organization name. (64 character limit)
• [Organization Unit]: Enter the organization unit name. (64 character limit)
• [CRT key] – [RSA key size]: The key length of the current CRT key is displayed.
• [CRT key] – [Last modified]: The generation date and time of the current CRT key is displayed.

What happens after I click [OK] on the self-signed certificate generation page?

Self-signed certificate is generated.

What characters can be inputted for the self-signed certificate?

The characters that can be input are as follows:

• Single-byte numbers: 0 to 9
• Single-byte alphabets: A to Z, a to z
• Single-byte symbols: – . _ , + / ( )

How do I confirm the information of the self-signed certificate generated by the Display?

Click [Certificate] → [Self-signed Certificate] → [Information] → [Confirm]. The information of the generated self-signed certificate is displayed.

What information is displayed when confirming the self-signed certificate information?

• [Common Name]: The Display name or the IP address is displayed.
• [Country]: The country code defined in ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 (two upper case alphabets) is displayed.
• [State]: The State, etc. is displayed.
• [Locality]: The locality is displayed.
• [Organization]: The organization name is displayed.
• [Organization Unit]: The organization unit name is displayed.
• [Not Before]: Displays the date and time that the self-signed certificate was issued.
• [Not After]: Displays the date and time that the self-signed certificate will expire (local time corresponding to 23:59, December 31, 2035 in Greenwich Mean Time).
• [CRT key] – [RSA key size]: The key length of the CRT key is displayed.
• [CRT key] – [Last modified]: The generation date and time of the CRT key is displayed.

How do I delete the generated self-signed certificate?

The generated self-signed certificate can be deleted by clicking [Certificate] → [Self-signed Certificate] → [Delete]. However, it cannot be deleted when [HTTPS set up] → [Connection] is set to [HTTPS]. Delete it after changing the setting to perform the HTTP communication.

When should I set the [HTTPS set up] page?

Set this page when HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure) communication encrypted with the SSL/TLS protocol is to be performed between the computer and the Display while the web control function is used. Click [Detailed set up] → [HTTPS set up].

What is necessary to perform the HTTPS communication?

To perform the HTTPS communication, it is necessary to install the certificate for authentication into the Display in advance.

Where can I find details of installing the certificate?

For details of installing the certificate, refer to “[Certificate] page”.

How do I set the connection method to the Display?

Set the connection method in the [Connection] section.

What are the options for the [Connection] setting?

• [HTTP]: Uses the HTTP communication. (Factory default setting)
• [HTTPS]: Uses the HTTPS communication.

How do I set the port number to be used with the HTTPS communication?

Set the port number to be used with the HTTPS communication in the [HTTPS port] section. The allowed port number is 1 to 65535. The factory default setting is 443.

How do I enable the HTTPS setup settings?

Click [Set].

What might happen when the [Connection] setting is changed from [HTTPS] to [HTTP]?

When the [Connection] setting is changed from [HTTPS] to [HTTP], the screen may not be displayed when the operation or update of the web control screen is performed. In such case, delete the cache of the web browser.

How do I set up the control system to connect to the Display?

Configure the setting for the control system required to connect to the Display as a client.

How do I set up secure communication?

Go to [Use TLS] and select [Enable] to perform secure communication using TLS (Transport Layer Security). Selecting [Disable] will perform unsecured communication.

How do I determine the Display on the network using an IP address?

Enter the IP address or the hostname of the connection destination in [IP Address/Hostname].

How do I determine the Display on the network using an IP ID?

Go to [IP ID] and set the IP ID using a number up to four digits. The default value is 3.

How do I determine the Display on the network using a Room ID?

Set the Room ID used to determine the Display on the network by entering up to 32 half-width characters in [Room ID].

What is the port number for unsecured communication?

The port number to be used with unsecured communication is set in [Non Secure Port]. The default value is 41794.

What is the port number for secure communication?

The port number to be used with secure communication is set in [Secure Port]. The default value is 41796.

How do I set up the authentication with the connection destination used with secure communication?

Select the authentication with the connection destination used with secure communication in [Authentication]. To perform connection authentication, select [Enable]. To not perform connection authentication, select [Disable].

How do I set up the username for connection authentication?

Enter the username used for connection authentication in [User Name] using up to 20 half-width characters.

How do I set up the password for connection authentication?

Enter the password used for connection authentication in [Password] using up to 20 half-width characters.

How do I update the [Control System] settings?

Click [Submit] to update the [Control System] settings.

How do I configure the settings to access the Display assigned to a server using the control system?

You will need to configure the settings required to access the Display assigned to a server using the control system.

How do I set up secure communication for the Display assigned to a server?

Go to [Use TLS] and select [Enable] to perform secure communication using TLS (Transport Layer Security). Selecting [Disable] will perform unsecured communication.

How do I determine the Display on the network using an IP ID on the server?

Go to [IP ID] and set the IP ID using a number up to four digits.

What is the port number for unsecured communication on the Display assigned to a server?

The port number to be used with unsecured communication is set in [Non Secure Port]. The default value is 41794.

What is the port number for secure communication on the Display assigned to a server?

The port number to be used with secure communication is set in [Secure Port]. The default value is 41796.

How do I set up the authentication with the connection destination used with secure communication on the Display assigned to a server?

Select the authentication with the connection destination used with secure communication in [Authentication]. To perform connection authentication, select [Enable]. To not perform connection authentication, select [Disable].

How do I set up the username for connection authentication on the Display assigned to a server?

Enter the username used for connection authentication in [User Name] using up to 20 half-width characters.

How do I set up the password for connection authentication on the Display assigned to a server?

Enter the password used for connection authentication in [Password] using up to 20 half-width characters.

How do I set up whether to use the Fusion server in the Cloud?

Go to [Crestron Fusion in the Cloud (FITC)] and select [Enable] to use the Fusion server in the Cloud. To not use the Fusion server in the Cloud, select [Disable].

How do I enter the URL of the Fusion server in the Cloud?

Enter the URL of the Fusion server in the Cloud in [FITC URL].

How do I update the server settings?

Click [Submit] to update the [Server] setting.

What happens if neither the server certificate nor the self-signed certificate is installed?

[Use TLS] will be fixed to [Disable].

What happens when [Use TLS] is set to [Disable]?

[Authentication] is fixed to [Disable], and [Secure Port] cannot be set.

What happens when [Crestron Fusion in the Cloud (FITC)] is set to [Disable]?

[FITC URL] cannot be entered.

How do I set the standby process against the search protocol of the control system and the application software?

Use [Auto Discovery]. To enable the standby process and enable automatic detection of the Display, select [Enable]. To disable the standby process, select [Disable].

How do I update the [Auto Discovery] setting?

Click [Submit] to update the [Auto Discovery] setting.

How do I download “Screen Transfer” software?

Click [Download]. The download screen appears. Click [Screen Transfer] to download the installer “setup.msi”. After “Screen Transfer” is installed, the screen of the PC can be sent to this unit via wired LAN.

How do I operate the display with the operation buttons displayed on the WEB browser?

Click [Browser Remote Control]. The [Browser Remote Control] screen is displayed. The operation buttons on the WEB browser are used in the same way as the supplied remote control.

What do I need to do to use the Browser Remote Control function?

Set [Network Control] to [On].

Is there another way to display the Browser Remote Control?

Yes, the Browser Remote Control can also be displayed by entering “http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/remote/” in the WEB browser URL entry field, where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address set for this display.

Is the button long press operation valid in the Browser Remote Control?

No, the button long press operation is invalid.

Do the restrictions for the remote control button operation set for [Setup] – [Controller user level] apply to the Browser Remote Control?

No, they do not apply.

Can I operate multiple Browser Remote Controls simultaneously?

No, avoid operating multiple Browser Remote Controls simultaneously.

Do the same operations apply to both administrator privileges and user privileges?

Yes.

What should I do if the Browser Remote Control screen is not displayed?

Consult your network administrator.

Why does the screen turn white for a moment when updating the Browser Remote Control screen?

This is not a malfunction.

What should I not do while operating the Browser Remote Control?

Do not operate the unit by other methods such as WEB control screen, remote control, and external control command.

What happens if the “Back” or “Forward” functions on the WEB browser are used?

The screen display may be abnormal, in which case, the subsequent operations are not guaranteed. If this occurs, update the WEB browser.

What do I need to do to use the USB media player?

Set [USB media player] to [Enable] in [Setup] – [USB media player settings].

What does the USB media player do?

The USB media player displays still pictures and motion pictures saved in a USB memory by inserting the USB memory device into the display.

What restrictions are there when using the “Single Media Player”?

The unit prevents a black screen from appearing at the switching timing of still pictures or motion pictures. However, there are the following restrictions:

• A black screen may appear when switching a motion picture codec.
• A black screen may appear or images may be disturbed when switching to motion pictures of a different frame rate or aspect ratio.

What happens if an angle of view for something other than for 16:9 is used?

Images may be disturbed near the end of playback.

How do I avoid image disturbance when switching to motion pictures of a different frame rate or aspect ratio?

Inserting a black screen (approx. 2 sec.) at the switching timing for all the motion pictures.

What is the content list delivery function of the Multi Monitoring & Control Software?

Content (still/motion pictures) played back on a USB media player and the playback list can be delivered using the content list delivery function of the Multi Monitoring & Control Software. Note that still pictures in jpg files and motion pictures other than H.265/HEVC can only be delivered.

How are the files played back in a Multi Media Player configuration using a single USB memory?

Files are played by a single unit.

How are the files played back in a Multi Media Player configuration using more than one unit connected using LAN cables?

The files in the USB memory are played back simultaneously.

How are the multiple units in a Multi Media Player configuration organized?

One of the multiple units becomes the parent, and the others are children.

What is required for Multi Media Player configurations?

One USB memory device is required for one unit. The parent requires both “scenario.dat” and “filelist.dat”, and the child requires “filelist.dat” only. “GroupID:G01” must be described without changing characters other than numbers (2-digit description required). Without description, the Multi Media Player does not function.

What may happen when motion pictures are played on the Multi Media Player?

A black screen may be displayed for a certain period of time at the switching timing of motion pictures.

What type of USB memory device is supported?

Commercially available USB memory devices are supported. Note that those with security functions are not supported. Operation is not guaranteed.

What format does the USB memory need to be formatted in?

USB memory devices other than those formatted in FAT16 or FAT32 cannot be used.

What is the maximum size of the USB memory?

Up to 32 GB of USB memory in size are supported.

What partition configuration is supported?

Only single partition configuration is supported.

What files need to be prepared in the USB memory for the media player?

Prepare the following files immediately below the root in the USB memory for the media player:

• Play file
• Scenario (as necessary)
• File list (as necessary)

What should be done with files irrelevant to playback?

Delete files irrelevant to playback from the USB memory device.

What is the maximum number of files that can be played back?

Up to 999 files can be played back.

What happens if more than the maximum number of files are present?

Some files are not played back. An error is displayed by the scenario file check.

What is the maximum number of valid lines in a Scenario file?

Up to 999 lines of Scenario files are valid.

What formats does the unit’s Media Player support for still pictures?

Extension	Format	Limitation
jpg/ jpeg/ jpe	JPEG	Number of pixels: Minimum 32 x 18 Maximum 4 096 x 4 096 (supports baseline only) YUV format: supports YUV444, YUV442 and YUV440 Colour mode: supports RGB only
bmp	Windows Bitmap	Number of pixels: Minimum 32 x 18 Maximum 4 096 x 4 096 (1 bit, 4 bits, 8 bits, 24 bits) Following formats are not supported: Run-length encoding, bit field, top-down, transparent data

Where should still picture files be saved?

Immediately below the root in the USB memory.

What formats does the unit’s Media Player support for motion pictures?

Extension	Codec	Video	Audio
avi	H.264/MPEG4 AVC		AAC-LC/LPCM/MP/WMA Standard
	MPEG4 Visual
	VC-1 Advanced
	VC-1 Simple & Main
mkv	H.264/MPEG4 AVC		AAC-LC/HE-AAC/LPCM/MP3
	MPEG4 Visual
	VC-1 Advanced
	VC-1 Simple & Main
	H.265/HEVC
wmv	H.264/MPEG4 AVC		LPCM/MP3/WMA Standard/WMA9/WMA10 Pro
asf
	MPEG4 Visual
	VC-1 Advanced
	VC-1 Simple & Main
mp4/ mov/flv	H.264/MPEG4 AVC		AAC-LC/HE-AAC/MP3
	MPEG4 Visual
	H.265/HEVC
ts/mts	H.264/MPEG4 AVC		AAC-LC/HE-AAC/LPCM/MP3
	H.265/HEVC

What are the limitations on the Video Codecs?

Codec	Resolution	Bit rate	Notes
H.264/ MPEG4 AVC	1 920 x 1 080p@60.0 3 840 x 2 160p@30.0	Maximum 80Mbps	– MVC (Multi-view Video Coding) is not supported.
H.265	3 840 x 2 160p@60.0 1 920 x 1 080p@60.0	Maximum 80Mbps	– Only 1 warp-point GMC supported<br>- Data Partitioning is not supported.
MPEG4 Visual	SP@L5/ ASP@L5<br>1 920 x 1 080p@30.0	Maximum 40Mbps	– Video standard specified by MPEG4 Part2
VC-1 Advanced	AP@L3<br>1 920 x 1 080i@30.0 1 920 x 1 080p@24.0	Maximum 40Mbps
VC-1 Simple & Main	SP@LL/SP@ ML/MP@LL/ MP@ML/ MP@HL<br>1 920 x 1 080p@30.0	Maximum 40Mbps

What are the limitations on the Audio Codecs?

Codec	Sampling frequency (kHz)	Bit rate (kbps)	Notes
WMA Standard	22.05/24/32/44.1/48	32 – 384
WMA 9		32 – 384
WMA 10 Pro		32 – 384
LPCM		64 – 1 536	Supported quantization bit: 8/16/24/32
AAC(LC)	8 – 1 440
HE-AAC		8 – 256	(Ver.2 Level4)

What is the maximum bit rate on the USB 3.0 memory?

It is the upper limit and depends on the performance of the USB memory device to be used.

What is the maximum size per one file?

2 GB.

Can files protected by Digital Rights Management (DRM) be played back?

No.

What may happen if files or folders include characters other than one-byte alphanumeric characters?

They may not be displayed correctly, or the playback may not be done properly. It is recommended to use only one-byte alphanumeric characters for files and folders.

What may happen if the audio codec of the motion picture file is incompatible in format?

The pictures may not be correctly displayed.

Can files that contain only audio be played back?

No.

What may happen if the maximum bit rate specified in the codec Profile or Level is exceeded?

Playback may not be possible.

What may happen even if the bit rate is less than the indicated maximum bit rate?

Playback may be impossible depending on the USB memory device.

What happens if the number of pixels of a file exceeds the screen size?

The picture quality will change.

What may happen to the images during playback depending on the type of motion picture?

The images may be distorted momentarily.

How can I confirm a part of the information of still pictures/motion pictures on the computer?

• Windows

1. Right-click the file, and then click [Properties].
2. Click the [Details] tab.

• Mac

1. Control-click the file, and then click [Get Info].
2. Click [Details].

How do I specify the play order and time for a play file?

Save the file under the name (one-byte alphabetical characters) “scenario.dat” immediately below the root in USB memory.

In what format should scenario files be saved?

Save files as UTF-8N format.

How many lines can be specified for Scenario?

1 to 999 lines can be specified for Scenario.

What is a file list and how should it be saved?

It is a list of play files. Save it under the name (one-byte alphabetical characters) “filelist.dat” immediately below the root in USB memory.

In what format should file list files be saved?

Save files as UTF-8N format.

What is a file name and what are the rules for entering it?

It is the name of a play file. A file name needs to include its extension. Enter the extension of a file name using one-byte alphanumeric characters.

Example:

Introduction.jpg

Contents_Video01.wmv

What is a file definition and what are the rules for entering it?

It is a file definition that is shared among scenarios and files. PHOTO_xxx: still image file definition VIDEO_xxx: moving image file definition. The “xxx” portion can be set from 001 to 999. Enter a file definition using one-byte alphanumeric characters.

What is the play time and what are the rules for entering it?

It is the play time of a file. Play time can be specified from 3 seconds to 24 hours (Unit: second). It can be set down to one-tenth (1/10) of a second using a decimal point (full stop). Play time is omissible. For still images, a file will be played for the period of time that you selected in [USB media player settings] – [Slide show duration]. For moving images: a file will be played for the duration of the play time of the file. Enter play time using one-byte numeric characters.

Examples:

10: 10 seconds

86400: 24 hours

10.5: 10.5 seconds

What may happen when playing back large sized files if the playing back duration is set short?

It may not be played back properly, for example, noise appears on the screen. In that case, set the playing back duration longer (10 seconds or longer).

What happens if the play time for a motion picture longer than the play time of the motion picture file is specified?

The last image of the file is displayed after the playback of the motion picture has finished.

What is the Group ID and what are the rules for entering it?

It is an ID used for grouping on a network during Multi Media Player conditions.

Example:

GroupID:Gxx : Group xx

The “xx” portion can be set from 01 to 10. Enter a group ID using one-byte alphanumeric characters.

What is “UTF-8N”?

UTF-8 encoding without BOM. Notepad for windows doesn’t support this encoding. Please use another editor supported UTF-8 encoding without BOM.

In a Single Media Player (Type 1), in what order will the files be played back?

Files will be played in the order in which their names appear in USB memory.

Are the Scenario and file list necessary for Single Media Player (Type 1)?

No, they are unnecessary.

What will the play contents be in the following setting example for a Single Media Player (Type 1)?

USB memory contents:

000_Introduction.jpg

001_Contents_Video1.wmv

002_Contents_Video2.wmv

003_Contents_Video3.wmv

The following contents will be played on repeat (loop):

1. 000_Introduction.jpg (Played for the duration set in [Slide show duration])
2. 001_Contents_Video1.wmv (Played for the duration of the play time of the file)
3. 002_Contents_Video2.wmv (Played for the duration of the play time of the file)
4. 003_Contents_Video3.wmv (Played for the duration of the play time of the file)

In a Single Media Player (Type 2), in what order will the files be played back?

Files will be played in the order they were listed in a scenario.

What needs to be entered into the Scenario and file list for Single Media Player (Type 2)?

Scenario: Enter [File name: Play time].

File list: Unnecessary.

What will the play contents be in the following setting example for a Single Media Player (Type 2)?

USB memory contents:

scenario.dat

Introduction.jpg

Contents_Video1.wmv

Contents_Video2.wmv

Contents_Video3.wmv

scenario.dat (scenario):

Introduction.jpg: 10

Contents_Video1.wmv: 10

Contents_Video2.wmv: 20

Contents_Video3.wmv:

The following contents will be played on repeat (loop):

1. Introduction.jpg (10 seconds)
2. Contents_Video1.wmv (10 seconds)
3. Contents_Video2.wmv (20 seconds)
4. Contents_Video3.wmv (Played for the duration of the play time of the file)

In a Single Media Player (Type 3), in what order will the files be played back?

Files will be played in the order they were listed in a scenario.

What needs to be entered into the Scenario and file list for Single Media Player (Type 3)?

Scenario: Enter [File definition: Play time].

File list: Enter [File definition: File name].

What will the play contents be in the following setting example for a Single Media Player (Type 3)?

USB memory contents:

filelist.dat

scenario.dat

Introduction.jpg

Contents_Video1.wmv

Contents_Video2.wmv

Contents_Video3.wmv

scenario.dat (scenario):

PHOTO_001:10

VIDEO_001:10

VIDEO_002:20

VIDEO_003:

filelist.dat (file list):

PHOTO_001:Introduction.jpg

VIDEO_001:Contents_Video1.wmv

VIDEO_002:Contents_Video2.wmv

VIDEO_003:Contents_Video3.wmv

The following contents will be played on repeat (loop):

1. Introduction.jpg (10 seconds)
2. Contents_Video1.wmv (10 seconds)
3. Contents_Video2.wmv (20 seconds)
4. Contents_Video3.wmv (Played for the duration of the play time of the file)

In a Multi Media Player, in what order will the files be played back?

Files will be played in the order they were listed in the scenario for Parent.

What needs to be entered into the Scenario and file list for a Multi Media Player?

Parent Side

Scenario: Enter [File definition: Play time]

File list – The first line: Enter [Group ID]

File list – The second and subsequent lines: Enter [File definition: File name]

Child side

Scenario: Unnecessary

File list – The first line: Enter [Group ID]

File list – The second and subsequent lines: Enter [File definition: File name]

What will the play contents be in the following setting example for a Multi Media Player?

Parent side USB memory contents:

filelist.dat

scenario.dat

L_Introduction.jpg

L_Contents_Video1.wmv

L_Contents_Video2.wmv

L_Contents_Video3.wmv

scenario.dat (scenario):

PHOTO_001:10

VIDEO_001:10

VIDEO_002:20

VIDEO_003:

filelist.dat (file list):

GroupID:G01

PHOTO_001:L_Introduction.jpg

VIDEO_001:L_Contents_Video1.wmv

VIDEO_002:L_Contents_Video2.wmv

VIDEO_003:L_Contents_Video3.wmv

Child side USB memory contents:

filelist.dat

R_Introduction.jpg

R_Contents_Video1.wmv

R_Contents_Video2.wmv

R_Contents_Video3.wmv

filelist.dat (file list):

GroupID:G01

PHOTO_001:R_Introduction.jpg

VIDEO_001:R_Contents_Video1.wmv

VIDEO_002:R_Contents_Video2.wmv

VIDEO_003:R_Contents_Video3.wmv

Play Contents

Parent side:

1. L_Introduction.jpg (10 seconds)
2. L_Contents_Video1.wmv (10 seconds)
3. L_Contents_Video2.wmv (20 seconds)
4. L_Contents_Video3.wmv (Played for the duration of the play time of L_ Contents_Video3.wmv (Parent side).)

Child side:

1. R_Introduction.jpg (10 seconds)
2. R_Contents_Video1.wmv (10 seconds)
3. R_Contents_Video2.wmv (20 seconds)
4. R_Contents_Video3.wmv (Played for the duration of the play time of L_ Contents_Video3.wmv (Parent side).)

How do I skip to the next or previous playback file while the menu screen is not displayed?

You can skip to the next playback file with the right arrow button, to the previous playback file with the left arrow button, or play back again from the beginning of the file with the down arrow button (Remote control operation only).

What happens when the skip operation is performed?

A black screen is inserted before playback. When the [Schedule play function] is enabled, the skip operation is disabled.

What happens if the date and time are changed by the [Date and time] setting?

The playback of the file currently being played is stopped, and the playback will be performed again from the beginning of the file.

Where can I run a USB memory contents check?

You can run a USB memory contents check in [USB media player settings] – [Scenario file check].

What happens if an error is present during the USB memory contents check?

The information is given with the following details:

A(B): C D

Where:

A: Name of the file with an error

B: Row with an error

C: Error code

D: Detail of the error

What are the error codes and details?

Error code	Detail of the error
1	No USB memory is inserted.
2	scenario.dat/filelist.dat cannot be opened.
3	There is an error in the contents of scenario.dat/filelist.dat.
4	The play file format is not supported.
5	No play file exists.
6	The necessary group ID for Multi Media Player has not been specified.
7	There are several identical file definitions.
8	The scenario’s play time is over the limit.
9	The file definition listed in the scenario is not in the file list.
10	The scenario contains 0 or over 1000 play files.
11	There are 0 or over 1000 play files. (Single Media Player (Type 1) only)
12	Only the group ID is listed on the file list. (Multi Media Player only)

For which error codes are only the error code and the detail of the error displayed?

Error code 1 and 11.

Does the USB memory contents check determine whether or not a play file is playable?

No.

What happens if a file cannot be played while Media Player is active?

An error message will be displayed.

What should be done when performing the synchronized playback on the Multi Media Player?

Check in the menu [USB media player settings] – [Scenario file check] that the file is playable.

How do I set up a LAN connection and IP address / Subnet mask?

Connect several units together with LAN cables and set up IP addresses / Subnet masks so that all the displays exist on the same network. An example is as follows:

Parent IP address: 192.168.10.1 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Child IP address: 192.168.10.2 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Child IP address: 192.168.10.3 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Child IP address: 192.168.10.4 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

What should I do with the [Network Control] of all displays?

Set to [On].

What are some notes about LAN connections?

• Depending on the network environment, synchronization may be largely lost.
• Do not connect other devices to prevent network traffic jams.
• With a router put in between the displays, you cannot set up a connection. Use them within the same subnet.
• Do not use wireless LAN for connection since playback may not be performed normally.

How do I start Single Media Player?

1. Insert the USB memory device for Media Player to the USB terminal on the side of the display.
2. Run a USB memory contents check.
3. Change INPUT to [USB].

How do I end Single Media Player?

Change INPUT to other than [USB].

What is a note about using a USB memory device?

Depending on the type of a USB memory device, it may come in contact with the periphery such as a back cover, and cannot be attached. Use a USB memory device connectable to this unit.

How do I start Multi Media Player?

1. Connect several units with LAN cables. (See “Example of setting up LAN connection and IP address / Subnet mask”)
2. Insert USB memory for Media Player into each Display.
3. Executes USB memory contents check on each Display.
4. Change INPUT for Child to [USB].
5. Change INPUT for Parent to [USB].

How do I end Multi Media Player?

Change INPUT for Parent to other than [USB].

What happens after Media Player ends?

The file to be played back next time varies depending on the setting of [USB media player settings] – [Resume play].

• When set to [On]: The file played prior to the end of Media Player starts playing from the beginning.
• When set to [Off]: Play starts from the beginning of the first file of the scenario.

What is a note about the resume play function?

The resume play function is retained until the unit is turned off or the USB memory device is taken out.

What is the Playlist edit function?

This function creates and edits a scenario file for the USB media player. Select [Setup] – [USB media player settings] – [Playlist edit] to select the desired content, set the playback order and play time, and output the file (scenario.dat) to the USB memory device.

What are some notes about the Playlist edit function?

• This section describes the function on the premise that a USB memory device connected to the USB terminal is used. When [Use memory select] is set to [Internal memory], the internal memory is used.
• Descriptions for the scenario (scenario.dat) are restricted by the USB media player.
• After the playlist is edited, “Single Media Player (Type 2)” operates.
• If a scenario file (scenario.dat) already exists in the USB memory device or internal memory, delete it or internal memory, and create a new one.
• If a file list file (filelist.dat) already exists in the USB memory device or internal memory, delete them.
• While editing the playlist, the following functions are disabled. [Position] [Sound] [Picture] [Setup] – [Signal] – [Input label] – [Power management settings] – [No signal power off] – [Image settings] – [Read user image] – [Multi display settings] – [Function button settings] – [Failover/Failback] – [Audio input select] – [Portrait settings] [Digital zoom]
• The screen and audio quality while editing the playlist is adjusted with the same content as that for the the USB memory device.
• Use a USB memory device for which file reading and writing can be normally performed.
• Use the remote control for the playlist editing function operation.

What is the File Selection Screen and what can I do on this screen?

Select content files to play. After selecting the files, press <6> to go to the next editing screen.

Press the remote control buttons to perform the following operations.

• <VOL +> Selects content files. (Add a check mark on the upper left of the thumbnail.)
• <VOL -> Cancels content selection. (Delete a check mark on the upper left of the thumbnail if there is.)
• <▲> <▼> <◄> <►> Moves the focus.
• <4> Deletes all the check marks.
• <ENTER> Plays content files or moves to a different hierarchy.
• <RETURN> Finishes editing the playlist or moves to a higher hierarchy.
• <6> Goes to the next editing screen.

What are some notes about the File Selection screen?

• If a scenario (scenario.dat) exists in the USB memory device or internal memory, it will be loaded automatically. If applicable files are present, they are already in the selected status on the content selection screen.
• Up to 999 lines can be read from a scenario (scenario.dat).
• If a file list (filelist.dat) exists in the USB memory device or internal memory, it will not be loaded even if a scenario (scenario.dat) is present, and then the content selection screen appears with no content files selected.
• In addition to files immediately below root in the USB memory device, files in folders can also be selected.
• A maximum of 999 content files can be selected.
• If 999 files are selected, pressing <VOL +> for files not selected cannot select such files.
• When all the check marks are removed with <4>, a confirmation screen is displayed before removal.

What is the Arrange screen and what can I do on this screen?

Arrange the selected content files in playback order, and set the playback time.

Press the remote control buttons to perform the following operations.

• <VOL +> Moves a content file up by one position.
• <VOL -> Moves a content file down by one position.
• <▲> <▼> <◄> <►> Moves the focus.
• <1> Copies the currently selected content file to add it to the list.
• <4> Deletes the currently selected content file from the list.
• <ENTER> Displays a screen to set playback time.
• <RETURN> Returns to the previous editing screen.
• <6> Goes to the next editing screen.

What happens if I press <ENTER> on the Arrange Screen?

Pressing <ENTER> will display a screen to set playback time. Entering numbers

What are some notes about the Arrange Screen?

• The setting range for playback time is 0, 3 (minimum) to 86400 (maximum). If 0 is set, the playback time setting is deleted.
• Playback time can be set in one second increments with the playlist editing function. If a scenario (scenario.dat) is already present and the playback time of the applicable files are specified with decimal points, writing the scenario file will convert the playback time to that in one second increments.
• For content files whose playback time is set, “: playback time (sec.)” is displayed on the right side of the file name. For content files whose playback time is not set, “:(number)” is displayed on the right side of the file name if they are still picture files. (The numbers are values set for [USB media player settings] – [Slide show duration]. For motion picture files, “:(—)” is displayed on the right side of confirmation screen is displayed before deletion.
• If 999 content files already exist, another file cannot be added even if <1> is pressed.

What is the File output screen and what can I do on this screen?

Select [Yes] with ▲/▼ and press <ENTER>. File output to the USB memory device or internal memory, starts.

What is the Exit screen?

The exit screen appears.

What is the Schedule Playback function using “Content Management Software”?

This unit supports “Content Management Software” to create schedule data on a PC required to play back still pictures and motion pictures.

What are the functions that can be set with “Content Management Software”?

• Content playback (Still pictures/Motion pictures)
• Music playback
• Input switch
• Power control
• Multi display setting
• Caption display

Where can I find the setting method and details of each function for Content Management Software?

Refer to the manual of “Content Management Software”.

What are some notes about the Schedule Playback function using “Content Management Software”?

• This section describes the function on the premise that a USB memory device connected to the USB terminal is used. When [Use memory select] is set to [Internal memory], the internal memory is used.
• To use this function, set [USB media player] and [Schedule play function] to [Enable] in [Setup] – [USB media player settings].
• About supported devices, refer to “Supported device”.
• When using this function, insert the USB memory device in power-on state or in schedule standby state. If the USB memory device is inserted in conditions other than the said states, the schedule playback is not performed.
• Functions restricted when using the “USB media player” are also restricted when using the schedule playback function.
• When [USB media player] is set to [Enable] and [Schedule play function] is set to [Enable], this unit enters schedule play mode, and the content is played back according to the set schedule. If it entered schedule play mode at the time when the schedule is already specified, the unit operates as follows according to [Play mode]:
  • In [Individual play] mode: Playback starts from the beginning of the specified schedule.
  • In [Synchronize play] mode: Synchronized playback starts at the next content start time.

What are some notes about schedule play mode?

• When the unit enters schedule play mode, the input is automatically switched to [USB] or [Internal Memory].
• Some of the main unit’s functions are disabled during schedule play mode.
• If the input is switched during schedule play mode, the schedule playback is suspended. To resume the schedule playback
  • Switching the input to [USB] or [Internal Memory] will resume playback from the next schedule.
  • If the power is turned off using the remote control, the power is turned on at the next power-on schedule. Then the schedule playback starts.
• The scenario playback function of the media player does not operate in [Schedule play mode].

What content is played back with the Content Playback function?

Specified content is played back at the time set for schedule. Playback files in the following formats are supported.

What are the file limitations for still pictures?

Extension	Format	Limitation
jpg/ jpeg/ jpe	JPEG	Number of pixels: Minimum 32 x 18 Maximum 4 096 x 4 096 (supports baseline only)<br>YUV format: supports YUV444, YUV442 and YUV440<br>Colour mode: supports RGB only
bmp	Windows Bitmap	Number of pixels: Minimum 32 x 18 Maximum 2 000 x 2 000 (1 bit, 4 bits, 8 bits, 24 bits)<br>Following formats are not supported: Run-length encoding, bit field, top-down, transparent

What are the file limitations for videos?

Extension	Codec	Audio
avi	H.264/MPEG4 AVC<br>MPEG4 Visual<br>VC-1 Advanced<br>VC-1 Simple & Main	AAC-LC/LPCM/MP3<br>WMA Standard
wmv	H.264/MPEG4 AVC<br>MPEG4 Visual<br>VC-1 Advanced<br>VC-1 Simple & Main	LPCM/MP3/ WMA Standard/WMA9/ WMA10 Pro
mp4 / mov	H.264/MPEG4 AVC<br>MPEG4 Visual<br>H.265/HEVC	AAC-LC/HE-AAC/MP3

What are some notes about Content Playback?

• Some files may not be played back even if they are supported formats described above.
• As for restrictions for movie codecs of playback files, see “Play file”.
• If the contents of setting files (under [PRIVATE] folder) created and delivered using “Content Management Software” are changed, operations are not guaranteed.
• During a time period for which no content is set, the screen is black with nothing displayed. During this period, the [Schedule waiting] message is displayed on the upper right of the screen. To hide this display on the screen, set [Setup] – [OSD settings] – [Onscreen display] to [Off].
• For details of each CODEC of content, check the restriction items for playback content of the USB media player function.

What content is played back with the Music Playback function?

Music content is played back at the time set with the schedule data. Playback files in the following formats are supported.

What are the file limitations for Music Playback?

Extension	Codec	Format
mp3	MPEG-1/2 Audio Layer-3	Sample rate: Maximum 48 kHz<br>Channel: Maximum 2 ch<br>Bit rate: Maximum 320kbps
wma	WMA

What are some notes about Music Playback?

• Some files may not be played back even if they are supported formats described above.
• If incompatible music content is scheduled, the music content is not played back.
• Music content can be played back only with the [USB] or [Internal Memory] input.
• Video content and music content cannot be played back simultaneously. If 2 pieces of content are set for playback at the same time, video content takes priority.
• If video content starts to be played back while music content is being played, the playback of the music content stops.
• When playing back music content after playback of video content has finished, the playback starts from the beginning of the music content.
• Music content cannot be played back in synchronization with other displays.
• Several minutes of preparation time are added in switching music content.

What does the Input Switch function do?

The input is switched to the specified input at the time set with the schedule data. When the set time has passed, the [USB] or [Internal Memory] input is restored.

What are some notes about the Input Switch function?

• The input is switched even if no signal is present at the input switch destination.
• When the input is switched, the input display does not appear.

What does the Power Control function do?

The power is turned on/off at the time set with the schedule data.

What are some notes about the Power Control function?

• If the power is turned off during schedule play mode, the unit enters the schedule standby mode.
• The standby electricity will be more than normal during the schedule standby mode.
• Some of the main unit functions in schedule play mode remain invalid during the schedule standby mode.
• The power-on schedule operates one minute before one minute before the power-on schedule, the power is not turned on at the specified time by the schedule playback function.
• The power-on operation by [Schedule play function] does not work in standby states other than the schedule standby mode.

What does the Multi screen display setting of the multi display function do?

Sets the following for playback content:

• Plays in the single playback mode.
• Plays in the synchronized playback mode.
• Changes the setting of [Multi display settings] – [Multi screen display] of the main unit.

How does content play in [Individual play] mode?

Content is played only on one display.

How does content play in [Synchronize play] mode?

Content is played on multiple displays in synchronization.

What settings must be set to play back in the synchronized playback mode?

• Set [USB media player] to [Enable].
• Set [Schedule play function] to [Enable].
• Set [Synchronize display] to [On].
• For [Parent or child setting], set one display with reference time to [Parent] and other displays to [Child].

What are some notes about Multi screen display?

• The operations of the single playback mode and the synchronized playback mode are different from those of Single Media Player and Multi Media Player of the existing USB media player.
• For playback in the synchronized playback mode, approx. 5 seconds of preparation time are added in switching content.
• To perform the synchronized playback with multiple displays, set the [Synchronize display] function to [On], and set the same time for all the displays for playback.
• If the time is not synchronized correctly with [Synchronize display] set to [On], the unit may not operate properly. Confirm the operation conditions of [Synchronize display].
• If [Multi display settings] – [Multi screen display] is specified in the schedule data of “Content Management Software”, the setting is switched to the specified multi screen display. The setting of [Multi screen display] cannot be changed during the specified schedule playback. When the specified schedule has finished, the setting of [Multi screen display] is restored to the state before setting.

What does the Caption Display function do?

A caption is displayed at the time set for the schedule data.

What are some notes about the Caption Display function?

• The caption is displayed on top of an image.
• A maximum of 600 characters can be displayed with caption.
• Scrolling of the caption may stop at switching timing of content playback or music playback.
• The caption is hidden by switching input. If the input is switched with the schedule playback function, the caption display continues. Also, if the schedule playback function is resumed, the caption is displayed from the beginning.
• Changing the settings of [OSD language], [Display orientation] or [Image rotation], or displaying the display ID/display name will delete the caption being displayed.
• When creating schedule data, if a caption with many characters is displayed with [Scroll] set to [No], the characters will run over on the screen.
• The caption does not synchronize with other displays even if [Play mode] is [Synchronize play].

What functions are disabled during schedule play mode?

The following main unit’s functions are set to [Disable (Off)] during schedule play mode:

• [Set up timer]
• [Screensaver]
• “Power management” function
• [No signal power off]
• [HDMI-CEC settings]
• [No activity power off]
• [OSD transparency]
• [Image settings] (Reading user image is disabled.)
• [Input search]
• [Initial input]
• [Input lock]
• [Failover/Failback]

What are some notes about the Disabled Functions during schedule play mode?

• Disabled functions are greyed out on the on-screen menu. Also, serial commands are in [ER401] state (Including the inquiry command).
• During schedule play mode, disabled functions are set to [Disable (Off)], and those operations are forcibly stopped.
• When schedule play mode has finished, the disabled functions are restored to the original setting values.
• For [Multi display settings] – [Multi screen display], only [Horizontal scale], [Vertical scale] and [Location] can be set. [Bezel H adjustment] and [Bezel V adjustment] cannot be set.
• ARC function cannot be used. Select [Setup] – [HDMI-CEC settings], and set [ARC] to [Off].

What does the Resume Operation setting do?

Sets the operation when the schedule playback is restored again after schedule play mode is stopped once.

• When set to [On]: The previous content before schedule play mode is stopped is played back from the beginning.
• When set to [Off]: The playlist scheduled to be played back at the current time is played back from the beginning.

What is a note about the Resume Operation?

When playback is scheduled in the synchronized playback mode, the playback is performed according to the set time in both [On] and [Off] cases.

What does the “Memory viewer” do?

The “Memory viewer” selects still pictures and motion pictures stored in a USB memory device or internal memory, and show them on the display.

What is a note about the “Memory viewer”?

This section describes the function on the premise that a USB memory device connected to the USB terminal is used. When [Use memory select] is set to [Internal memory], the internal memory is used.

What files can I display with the “Memory viewer”?

The following files are supported.

What are the file limitations for still pictures in “Memory viewer”?

Extension	Format	Limitation
jpg/ jpeg/ jpe	JPEG	Number of pixels: Minimum 32 x 32, Maximum 4 096 x 4 096 (supports baseline only)<br>YUV format: supports YUV444, YUV442 and YUV440<br>Colour mode: supports RGB only
bmp	Windows Bitmap	Number of pixels: Minimum 32 x 32, Maximum 4 096 x 4 096 (1 bit, 4 bits, 8 bits, 24 bits)<br>Following formats are not supported: Run-length encoding, bit field, top-down, transparent data<br>If the number of pixels exceeds 1 920 x 1 080, a long time may be required to display content.

What are the file limitations for motion pictures in “Memory viewer”?

Extension	Codec	Audio
avi	H.264/MPEG4 AVC<br>MPEG4 Visual<br>VC-1 Advanced<br>VC-1 Simple & Main	AAC-LC/LPCM/MP/ WMA Standard
wmv	H.264/MPEG4 AVC<br>MPEG4 Visual<br>VC-1 Advanced<br>VC-1 Simple & Main	LPCM/MP3/ WMA Standard/WMA9/ WMA10 ProMPEG4 Visual<br>VC-1 Advanced<br>VC-1 Simple & Main
asf	H.264/MPEG4 AVC<br>MPEG4 Visual<br>VC-1 Advanced<br>VC-1 Simple & Main
mp4/ mov/flv	H.264/MPEG4 AVC<br>MPEG4 Visual<br>H.265/HEVC	AAC-LC/HE-AAC/MP3
ts/mts	H.264/MPEG4 AVC<br>H.265/HEVC	AAC-LC/HE-AAC/LPCM/ MP3

What are the video codec limitations for motion pictures in “Memory viewer”?

Video Codec	Resolution	Limitation
H.264/ MPEG4 AVC	1 920 x 1 080p@60.0<br>3 840 x 2 160p@30.0<br>Bit rate: Maximum 80Mbps	* MVC (Multi-view Video Coding) is not supported.
H.265	3 840 x 2 160p@60.0<br>1 920 x 1 080p@60.0<br>Bit rate: Maximum 80Mbps	* Only 1 warp-point GMC supported<br>* Data Partitioning is not supported.
MPEG4 Visual	1 920 x 1 080p@30.0<br>Bit rate: Maximum 40Mbps	* Video standard specified by MPEG4 Part2
VC-1 Advanced	1 920 x 1 080i@30.0<br>1 920 x 1 080p@24.0<br>Bit rate: Maximum 40Mbps
VC-1 Simple & Main	1 920 x 1 080p@30.0<br>Bit rate: Maximum 40Mbps

What are the audio codec limitations for motion pictures in “Memory viewer”?

Audio Codec	Sampling frequency (kHz)	Bit rate (kbps)
MP3	8/11.025/12/16/ 22.05/24/32/44.1/ 48	8 – 320
WMA Standard		32 – 384
WMA 9		32 – 384
WMA 10 Pro		32 – 384
LPCM		64 – 1 536
AAC(LC)		8 – 1 440
HE-AAC (Ver.2 Level4)		8 – 256

What are the file limitations for music in “Memory viewer”?

Extension	Codec	Format
mp3	MPEG-1/2 Audio Layer-3	Sample rate: Maximum 48 kHz<br>Channel: Maximum 2 ch<br>Bit rate: Maximum 320kbps
wma	WMA

What are some notes about the supported files in “Memory viewer”?

• A maximum bit rate is the upper limit on the USB 3.0 memory, and depends on the performance of a USB memory device to be used.
• Some information for still image/movie files can be viewed with a computer where relevant files are accessible.
• About supported devices, refer to “Supported device”.
• Some files may not be played back even if they are supported formats described above.
• If the number of pixels of a file exceeds the screen size, the picture quality will change.

How do I view still image/movie file information on a Windows computer?

1. Right-click a file, and click [Properties].
2. Click the [Details] tab.

How do I view still image/movie file information on a Mac?

1. Click a file while holding down the “Control” key, and click [Get Info].
2. Click [More Info].

What are some notes about file viewing in “Memory viewer”?

• The maximum size of file is 2 GB.
• The maximum number of file/folder is up to 2 000. If the number exceeds, 2 000 files/folders are displayed.
• You cannot play the files which are protected by Digital Rights Management (DRM).
• If files or folders include characters other than one-byte alphanumeric characters, they may not be displayed correctly, or the playback may not be done properly. It is recommended to use only one-byte alphanumeric characters for files and folders.
• Thumbnails of files may not be correctly displayed information) and extension has 248 one-byte alphanumeric characters or more, the thumbnail is not displayed.
• When playing back in series several kinds of content with different aspect ratios, the image may be distorted momentarily when switching content. It is recommended to unify the aspect ratio for consecutive playback.
• Depending on the type of motion picture, the images may be distorted momentarily during playback or thumbnail display.

How do I display the “Memory viewer” screen?

Press <INPUT> to switch the input to [MEMORY VIEWER]. Assigning [Input] function to the numeric buttons (<1> to <6>) can switch to [MEMORY VIEWER] with a single touch of a button. The thumbnails or the file list is displayed. You can switch the display between the thumbnail view and file list view by setting [Setup] – [Memory viewer settings].

What is a note about operating the “Memory viewer”?

Use the remote control to operate “Memory viewer”.

What is on the Thumbnail view screen?

1. Thumbnails: Displays folders, pictures, videos and music files. The following icons will be displayed.

   • Moves to the upper level when selected.
   • Moves to the lower level when selected.
   • Picture file.
   • Video file.
   • Music file.
   • The file has a supported extension but cannot be played.

2. Information of the selected file.

3. Remote control operation guide

What is a note about the Thumbnail view?

If the image includes Exif information, orientations of the thumbnail image and the playback image may differ.

What are the playback method icons in the Thumbnail view remote control operation guide?

Type of content	Icon
[Picture]
[Picture / Video]
[Video]
[Video / Music]
[Music]
[Picture / Music]
[All]

What are the display order options in the Thumbnail view remote control operation guide?

• File name: [Ascending]
• Date and time: [Ascending]
• File name: [Descending]
• Date and time: [Descending]

What are the play method options in the Thumbnail view remote control operation guide?

• [None]
• [Random]
• [Single]
• [Select]
• [All]
• [Program]

What is on the File List View screen?

1. File list: Displays folders, pictures, videos and music files.
2. Displays information of the selected file.
3. Remote control operation guide

How do I select a file to play?

1. In the thumbnail view / the file list view, press ▲/▼/◄/► to select the file you want to play.
2. Press <ENTER>. The picture will be displayed on the full screen.

What is a note about file selection?

• When [Play method] is [Select] or [Program], press <VOL +> <VOL -> to specify the file you want to play.
• File selection is cancelled by the following operations.
  • Folder movement
  • [Play method] change
  • Removal of USB memory device
  • Input switch
  • Power-off

What operations can I perform with the remote control on the picture play screen?

Button	Function
	Skip to the previous file.
	Skip to the next file.
	Rotate the picture clockwise (90°).
	Rotate the picture counterclockwise (90°).
<ENTER>	Pause / Restart playing.
<RETURN>	Return to the list view.
<1>	Not used
<2>	Display / Hide the detail of the content that is being played back.
<5>	Display / Hide the remote control operation guide.
<6>	Not used

How do you control the playback of the video?

Pressing <4> during play will rewind and <6> will fast forward the video. The speed changes in 2 steps each time you press the button and returns to normal play.

What does the : button do?

Skip to the previous file.

What does the : button do?

Skip to the next file.

What do the : and : buttons do?

Play from the beginning. (Plays the current file from the beginning.)

What does the <ENTER> button do?

Pause / Restart playing.

What does the <RETURN> button do?

Return to the list view.

What does the <1> button do?

Skip 10 seconds backward.

What does the <2> button do?

Display / Hide the detail of the content that is being played back.

What does the <3> button do?

Skip 30 seconds forward.

What does the <4> button do?

Rewind.

What does the <5> button do?

Display / Hide the remote control operation guide.

What does the <6> button do?

Fast forward.

What should you note about the “Skip 10 seconds backward” or “Skip 30 seconds forward” functions?

Depending on the content to be played, “Skip 10 seconds backward” or “Skip 30 seconds forward” may not operate correctly.

How do you return to the thumbnail view or file list view?

Press <RETURN>.

What main unit’s functions are disabled while using the “Memory viewer”?

• [Read user image] in [Image settings]
• Multi-screen display of the multi-display
• [Digital zoom]
• [No signal power off]
• [Position]
• [Function button settings] (Disabled while content is being played)

What is recommended to prevent image retention on the liquid crystal panel?

To prevent image retention on the liquid crystal panel, using the screensaver function is recommended.

What is required to use the WhiteBoard function?

To use the WhiteBoard function, an external touch panel or mouse is required.

What should you do when using the WhiteBoard function?

When using the WhiteBoard function, select [Setup] – [Whiteboard settings], and set [Whiteboard] to [On].

What operation should you use when using a mouse with the Whiteboard function?

When using a mouse, use click operation.

What operation should you use when using an external touch panel with the Whiteboard function?

When using an external touch panel, use touch operation.

In what cases does the Whiteboard function not support the operation?

• When [Display orientation] is set to [Portrait]
• When [Image rotation] is set to [180 degrees]

From where is the Control menu displayed?

From the Control menu displayed at the bottom of the screen, click the function you want to use.

How do you show the Control menu?

To show the Control menu, navigate to [Setup] – [Whiteboard settings], and set [Control menu].

Where is the Control menu when [Control menu]: [Bottom]?

[Image of Control menu at bottom of screen]

Where is the Control menu when [Control menu]: [Top]?

[Image of Control menu at top of screen]

What are the Control menu options?

• Input selection
• Input display
• WhiteBoard
• Zoom
• App Launcher
• Volume level control / Mute
• Close
• Display setting

What does the Input selection option in the Control menu do?

Switches the input source to the one you click. You can select the input sources displayed on the Control menu.

What does the Input display option in the Control menu do?

Lists the selectable input sources.

What does the WhiteBoard option in the Control menu do?

Transparent mode or WhiteBoard mode is set. WhiteBoard is started up with the pen color clicked. You can start it up with blue, yellow, red, or black.

When are the buttons in the WhiteBoard Control menu option grayed out, and you cannot start up WhiteBoard?

• Several seconds after the input source is switched

In what cases, instead of WhiteBoard, does the simple drawing function start up?

• When USB input is active
• When the comparison mode is activated

What does the Zoom option in the Control menu do?

Sets zoom mode in which you can expand or shrink the image.

What does the App Launcher option in the Control menu do?

Starts up App Launcher on this unit.

What does the Volume level control / Mute option in the Control menu do?

You can adjust the volume level by clicking the buttons. Click to mute the sound; changes to and the volume level control is disabled. To cancel the muting, click it again.

What does the Display setting option in the Control menu do?

Displays a screen to select the menu.

What does the Close option in the Control menu do?

Click “Close” to minimize the Control menu. Click the minimized tab to restore the Control menu.

When is the Control menu not displayed?

When a menu other than the Control menu is displayed, the Control menu is not displayed. When the displayed object is closed, the Control menu is displayed.

What does the built-in WhiteBoard allow you to do?

The built-in WhiteBoard allows you to use the display as a whiteboard and perform pen drawing such as marking on an image.

How do you enable pen drawing on the built-in WhiteBoard?

To enable pen drawing, select [Setup] – [Whiteboard settings], and set [Whiteboard] to [On].

What do you use to perform pen drawing on the built-in WhiteBoard?

Use a finger to perform pen drawing.

Where can images with markings be saved?

Images with markings can be saved in the built-in memory or USB memory with its background.

What should you note about using the display by entering data or work, including but not limited to, motion picture and photography through external input to this display?

In the case that you use this Display by entering the data or the work, including but not limited to, motion picture and photography through external input to this Display, the data or the work you are permitted to use in this Display except for the quoting shall be created by yourself or shall be authorized to use by the author of the data or the work.

What are the two modes of pen drawing?

1. WhiteBoard mode
2. Transparent mode (Drawing on video and still image)

What will happen with the WHITEBOARD input?

With the WHITEBOARD input, drawing will be made on the white background.

How do you select the [WHITEBOARD] input?

Select the [WHITEBOARD] input.

How do you select the [WHITEBOARD] input using the remote control?

Press <INPUT> to select the [WHITEBOARD] input. If the function of a numeric button accessible through [Setup] – [Function button settings] has been assigned to [Input (WHITEBOARD)], simply pressing it can switch the input to [WHITEBOARD].

How do you select the [WHITEBOARD] input using the mouse?

Click [WHITEBOARD] in the Control menu.

What does the display enter when using WhiteBoard mode?

The display enters the WhiteBoard mode allowing you to perform pen drawing on the white background.

How do you display the main menu in WhiteBoard mode?

Click to display the main menu for pen drawing.

What can be changed in the main menu in WhiteBoard mode?

The background can be changed in the main menu.

What can the background of WhiteBoard be changed to?

The background of WhiteBoard can be changed to any other color than white in the setting menu for the built-in applications.

What should you do if the input is not [WHITEBOARD]?

If the input is not [WHITEBOARD], switch the mode to WhiteBoard in [Whiteboard] of the main menu.

What button is disabled at the time of the [WHITEBOARD] input?

At the time of the [WHITEBOARD] input, the Exit button is disabled.

Where will drawing be made when using Transparent mode (Drawing on video and still image)?

Drawing will be made on the image of the computer or HDMI input shown on the display.

How do you switch to Transparent mode?

1. Switch to an input source.
2. Start up WhiteBoard from the Control menu.

What does the display enter when using Transparent mode?

The display enters the transparent mode allowing you to draw on video or still images.

What do the function buttons on the Main menu in Transparent mode do?

Click the function button on the Main menu to switch between the modes.

What does the Transparent button on the Main menu do?

Switches to transparent mode.

What does the Whiteboard button on the Main menu do?

Switches to WhiteBoard mode.

How do you exit from WhiteBoard mode?

Click in the Main menu.

What do the function buttons on the Main menu do?

Click the function button of the main menu to activate the desired function. The function buttons displayed differ depending on the mode.

Where will the main menu appear when you click to display it?

The main menu will appear on the side where you click shown in the right or left of the screen.

What are the Main menu options?

• Zoom magnification display
• Utilization memory gauge / Memory utilization amount gauge. It extends to the right according to the utilization. It turns red when the remaining amount becomes low.
• Minimizes the menu.
• [Shrink] Zooms down the view. (up to 100%)
• [Expand] Zooms up the view. (up to 400%)
• [Zoom] Sets zoom mode.
• [Transparent] Sets background transparent mode on WhiteBoard.
• [Whiteboard] Sets the white background mode on WhiteBoard. (A color other than white can also be set.)
• [Undo] Cancels the previous action. (Up to 20 actions)
• [Redo] Redos the action you canceled.
• [Pen] Used to draw free lines such as characters and figures.
• [Select] Used to select a drawing object.
• [Marker] Is a translucent pen.
• [Line] Used to draw a straight line and arrow.
• [Shape] Used to draw a square or circle.
• [Stamp] Used to paste an image like a stamp.
• [Eraser] Erases one object drawn on the screen.
• [Erase all] Removes all drawn objects.
• [Background] Sets the background of WhiteBoard.
• [File] Used to save data, read data, or perform other file handling operations.
• [Exit] Closes WhiteBoard.
• [Settings] Used to configure WhiteBoard function and control settings.

What are the options within the setting menu for built-in applications including WhiteBoard?

• Guide text: Used to set the text displayed under the buttons on the Main menu.
• Page menu display position: Used to set the position at which the page menu is displayed.
• Displays distance/angle information when possible.: Used to set the display of information about the length (distance) and angle in line or figure drawing.
• Save background image and user stamp when saving file: Used to select whether to save the background image and user stamp used during drawing when saving the file in the pwb format (file for built-in WhiteBoard).
• Save file to internal memory (whiteboard, captured image): Used to set saving of target data to internal memory in this unit.
• Captured image save format: Used to set the format to save screen-captured images.
• Switches input when launching Comparison mode.: Used to set the input automatically switched to when the comparison mode application is started up.
• Internal memory / Mbyte: Displays the utilization and total capacity of the built-in memory.
• Whiteboard background
  • Whiteboard mode background color (default): Used to set the background color applied in WhiteBoard mode.
  • Graph paper size: Used to set the grid cell size of the background graph paper.
  • Whiteboard background: Grid 1/Grid 2 size: Used to set the cell size.
  • Number of lines in English notebook: Used to set the number of lines to display on one screen of the background English note.
  • Number of staff lines: Used to set the number of lines to display on one screen of the background staff notation.
  • Horizontally ruled notebook size: Used to set the size of the horizontal ruled note.
  • Vertically ruled notebook size: Used to set the size of the vertical ruled note.
• Stamp / background selection: Used to switch displayed stamp or background according to the intended use of this unit.

What should you note about [PNG] in the [Captured image save format]?

Selecting [Captured image save format] for [PNG] makes the saving / reading speed slow.

What happens when data is saved with [Save background image and user stamp when saving file] set to [Off]?

When data is saved with [Save background image and user stamp when saving file] set to [Off], those images will not be displayed when data reference is made on another unit.

What happens when memory usage exceeds 60%?

The following warning message will be displayed. [Memory usage has exceeded 60%. Data cannot be written if it exceeds 80%.]

What happens when memory usage exceeds 80%?

The following warning message will be displayed. [Memory usage has exceeded 80%. You can continue using the whiteboard, but cannot add pages or write data. Save the file and restart the whiteboard.]

How do you perform pen drawing?

Select a function in the main menu before starting drawing.

1. Click a drawing button. Pen / Marker / Line / Shape / Stamp
2. Draw on the display.

How do you change the drawing settings?

The color and thickness of the Pen and Marker can be changed separately. The Shape and Line colors are the same as the pen settings. The changed items are displayed in the palette menu, and are displayed in tabs for each category.

What does the slider in the drawing settings allow you to do?

The slider allows you to freely set the thickness of the pen. You can check how thick it is on the preview screen.

How do you erase a drawn object to remove a small part?

1. Click [Eraser].
2. Drag the mouse and trace the part to erase.
3. The drawing object of the traced part is selected and displayed.

Is it possible to delete only part of a drawing object?

It is not possible to delete only part of a drawing object. If you accidentally delete one, Click the [Undo] button on the menu to restore it.

How do you clear all drawing objects?

Click [Erase all]. All the drawn objects are removed.

How do you select the mode?

Click [Whiteboard] or [Transparent] on the main menu to switch the drawing mode.

What does Transparent do?

Switches to transparent mode

What does Whiteboard do?

Switches to WhiteBoard mode The input does not switch to [WHITEBOARD].

What should you note when the input is [WHITEBOARD]?

When the input is [WHITEBOARD], only the WhiteBoard mode can be used. It is not possible to change the mode.

Where can drawings be saved?

Drawings can be saved in the internal memory or USB memory together with the background image, and read as a page. USB memories are used by connecting to the USB terminal on the display.

What are the options within the File menu?

• New file: Creates a new project file.
• Read file: Loads a saved project file.
• Save file: Saves created data in a file.
• Read other file format: Reads image data in a format other than the project file format, image data saved sequentially for each page, and PDF.
• Save other file format: Saves data on WhiteBoard in image format and PDF format, which are saved sequentially for each image and page.

What is recommended for security reasons after using internal memory?

For security reasons, it is recommended to delete the stored files after using the internal memory.

How are pages managed and stored?

Pages are managed in files and are stored in the internal memory and USB memory.

What format are pages and drawing objects saved in?

Normally, all page / drawing objects are saved in one file in a proprietary format called “pwb”.

How are files normally named?

Files are normally named in the form of “Wbyyyymmdd-*** (serial number).pwb”.

In what format is it also possible to save files?

It is also possible to save files in JPEG format for each page.

How do you save files in JPEG format?

In that case, save using single image save / sequentially numbered images save.

How do you create a new file using the WhiteBoard function?

Select “[New file]” to create a new file. If any changes have been made on WhiteBoard, a dialog prompting you to save the data will be displayed. Click “[Do not save]” to discard the current drawing objects without saving them and create a new one.

How do you read a file using the WhiteBoard function?

Loads created whiteboard data (pwb). On the left pane, you can select “[Internal memory]” or “[USB memory]” for the source to load data from. When you select a file, the file name, format, and location are displayed at the lower right. Click “[Read]” to load the selected data and display it on WhiteBoard.

How do you save a file using the WhiteBoard function?

Saves the current drawing objects. For the destination, “[Internal memory]” or “[USB memory]” is selectable.

If you want to print the drawing object on WhiteBoard, how would you do that?

You can save it to a USB memory in the PDF format and print it from a PC.

How do you load a file that is not in the pwb format?

Usable formats are “JPEG”, “PNG”, “SVG”, “PDF”, and folder (all loadable images in the folder are loaded). On the left pane, you can select capture data or USB memory for the location from which a file is loaded. When you select a file, the file name, format, and location are displayed at the lower right. Click “[Read]” to load the selected data and display it on WhiteBoard. While selecting USB memory, double click the folder name displayed in the file list on the left to move to that folder.

How do you save a Whiteboard data file in another format?

Drawn whiteboard data is saved. For the destination, only “[USB memory]” is selectable. The usable save formats are “[Image file (JPEG)]”, “[Image file (PNG)]”, “[PDF file]”, “[Sequentially numbered image files (JPEG)]”, and “[Sequentially numbered image files (PNG)]”.

When saving a Whiteboard data file in a PDF format, how many files will the pages be saved in?

All pages are saved in one file.

When saving a Whiteboard data file as sequentially numbered images, how are the files created?

Files are created for each page in the specified format and saved in the displayed folder.

How do you switch the drawing page?

When drawing with the WhiteBoard function, you can add a page. Use the Page menu at the right and left on the top or bottom of the screen to add or move pages.

How do you switch between pages?

Click < and > to switch and display the project data pages in order.

What does the number on the left of the Page menu indicate?

The current page number.

What does the number on the right of the Page menu indicate?

The last page number.

What does clicking the thumbnail display button on the Page menu do?

Click to display a list of thumbnails.

What does clicking the minimize button on the Page menu do?

Click to minimize the Page menu.

What is the simple drawing function?

In addition to the WhiteBoard function, this unit has a “simple drawing function” that allows you to make drawings easily with a pen or marker.

Under what conditions can the simple drawing function be used?

It operates under the following conditions where WhiteBoard cannot be used:

• When USB input is active
• When the comparison mode is activated

What are the tools available in the simple drawing function?

From the left:

• Pen / Marker / Eraser / Clear All

What color are the pen and marker set to?

The color of the pen and marker is set to the color selected in the Control menu.

How does the eraser work in the simple drawing function?

Eraser erases a zone to which it is applied. (This is different from the WhiteBoard operation.)

When is the drawing data deleted when using the simple drawing function?

Drawing data is deleted when the screen is refreshed.

Can the drawing data from the simple drawing function be saved?

Drawing data cannot be saved. (It becomes a function to draw temporarily.)

What happens when you select “[Capture]” during the simple drawing function?

It gets captures excluding video parts (drawing contents, etc.).

Is the range where the simple drawing function can draw different from that of the WhiteBoard function?

Yes, the range where the simple drawing function can draw is different from that of the WhiteBoard function.

What is the Comparison mode function used for?

Use the Comparison mode function to compare the image from the real projector with the data on the internal memory or USB memory.

What happens when starting the Comparison mode function?

When starting this function, it is possible to automatically switch to the input to which a real projector is connected.

Which USB memory is used for comparing in Comparison mode?

When comparing using a USB memory, the first one inserted is valid.

How do you activate the Comparison mode function?

1. Select App Launcher in the Control menu and click “[Comparison mode]” from the launcher to launch it.
2. When it is started, the following screen is displayed: [Comparison mode] menu.

What are the functions available in Comparison mode?

The Comparison mode has the following functions:

• Capturing a video: Capture the video displayed on the screen and saves it into the internal memory and USB memory.

How do you capture a video in Comparison mode?

Click the “[Capture]” button in the comparison mode menu. The video at the time of clicking is captured and saved in the internal memory and USB memory.

What is captured on one screen in Comparison mode?

Only the video is captured.

What is captured on a screen other than one screen (on a split display, during simple drawing, etc.) in Comparison mode?

All other than video parts (drawing contents, etc.) are captured.

What is captured during zooming, simple drawing, split screen, and image display in Comparison mode?

Screen shots including drawing contents are saved.

What happens when saving a captured image in Comparison mode?

When saving, the captured image is displayed on the screen. The saved destination is the captured image folder. The folder that opens by default changes depending on whether or not a USB memory device is used.

Why might you not be able to capture the intended image for a movie with large actions in Comparison mode?

Because there is a gap between the click of the “[Capture]” button and the actual capture timing, it may not be possible to capture the intended image for a movie with large actions.

What happens if you click “[Image list]” or “[Disp mode]” before selecting a comparison image in Comparison mode?

Only the data captured on the Live 1 screen will be displayed in the new order. To display other captured data, select it using the comparison image selection function.

How do you display a captured image in Comparison mode?

Select a captured image and display it on the screen. Click the “[Image list]” button in the “[Comparison mode]” menu. Click to display a list of captured images inside the menu.

What happens if you click the image part of the displayed image list in Comparison mode?

The image will be enlarged on the screen. If the displayed image list does not fit on the screen, use the up and down arrows to switch.

How do you change screen mode in Comparison mode?

Switch the screen display to 1/2/4/9 screens. Click the “[Disp mode]” button in the [Comparison mode] menu. Click it to change the screen display pattern. Each time you click, the number of screen splits changes from 1 → 2 → 4 → 9 → 1.

What is displayed on a split screen in Comparison mode?

On a split screen, the live video is displayed on the left pane (when the 2-split screen) / upper left pane (when other than the 2-split screen). If the displayed image list does not fit on the screen, use the up and down arrows to switch.

How do you overlay two data layers transparently to compare them in Comparison mode?

This function is only valid when displaying a 2-split screen. Click the “[Compare transparency]” button. You can compare two data layers by overlaying them transparently. In this mode, the slider for setting the degree of transparency is displayed in the [Comparison mode] menu and can be adjusted. Click the “[Return]” button at the top right of the menu to return to the regular 2-split screen.

Can the live video display function be used when an arbitrary folder on a USB memory is specified?

No, the live video display function cannot be used when an arbitrary folder on a USB memory is specified.

How do you select an image file for comparison in Comparison mode?

Select an image file to compare. Click the “[Folder]” button in the [Comparison mode] menu. The image file selection screen is displayed. At that time, the [Comparison mode] menu is disabled.

What is displayed when the image file selection screen is displayed?

The image file selection pane is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the image files of the selected folder are displayed on the right side. There are two types of image file selection, “[Capture]” and “[USB memory]”, which can be switched and selected on the TAB display.

How do you select a [Capture] image?

Select “[Internal memory]” or “[USB memory]”. When selected, a list of captured images in the memory is displayed on the right side of the screen.

How do you select a [USB memory] image?

Double click a folder to move to the folder. The image file list in the selected folder is displayed on the right side of the screen.

How do you go back to the folder by one level above?

Select “…/”.

What should you do if the displayed image file list does not fit on the screen?

Use the up and down arrows to switch.

How do you select whether to display live video in Comparison mode?

Select whether to make one of the comparison images (left/upper left) live video. Click the “[Enable live]” check box to display the live image on the left or upper left when making a comparison. When unchecked, only the selected image is displayed.

How do you select an image in Comparison mode?

Select to narrow down the images used for comparison from the images in the selected folder. The image is selected by clicking the check box on the upper right of the image displayed on the right. Click again to cancel the selection.

How do you select/deselect all images in a folder in Comparison mode?

Click the “[Select all/Deselect all]” check box to select/deselect all images in the folder together.

What happens when you click “[OK]” with images selected in Comparison mode?

The normal comparison mode screen is displayed with the images selected.

What happens when you click “[Cancel]” in Comparison mode?

You go back without the images selected.

How do you expand/shrink the screen?

You can expand the screen display. A zoom icon is displayed when zooming is enabled.

How do you zoom up/down the screen?

Use “Expand/Shrink” button to zoom up/down the screen.

How do you move the image in a direction?

Use the 4-way move button to move the image in that direction.

What happens to the magnification when the zoom function is canceled?

The magnification returns to 100%.

When is the zoom canceled?

The zoom is canceled when the display mode (Disp mode) is changed.

How do you draw on the screen in Comparison mode?

Click the pen button in the Control menu while the comparison mode is set. A simple drawing menu is displayed instead of the comparison mode menu.

Is the simple drawing function different from the drawing function of WhiteBoard?

Yes, it is different from the drawing function of WhiteBoard.

What can be used for drawing when using the simple drawing function in Comparison mode?

Pen and marker can be selected for drawing.

How many colors are available for drawing using the simple drawing function in Comparison mode?

The colors available for drawing are limited (4 colors. Related with the pen button color in the Control menu).

What happens to the drawing data if you perform an operation other than drawing in Comparison mode?

If you perform an operation other than drawing, all drawn data will be erased.

Will drawing data written using the simple drawing function be zoomed?

Drawing data written using the simple drawing function will not be zoomed. However, if you have already zoomed, the magnification will be retained.

What are the [Comparison mode] menu commands?

• “[Exit]”: Quits Comparison mode
• “[Folder]”: Displays the data selection screen.
• “[Pause]”: Pauses the video on the display screen.
• “[Capture]”: Captures the displayed image. (Menus and other UI objects cannot be captured. The zoom is applied to image-capturing.)
• “[Image list]”: Displays a data list for comparison when the screen is set to one screen.
• “[Disp mode]”: Switches the number of screen splits. The number of screen splits changes each time you click it (1 → 2 → 4 → 9 → 1).
• Zoom magnification display:
  • Expand
  • Shrink
  • Move up
  • Move right
  • Move left
  • Move down
• Settings: Displays the application setting screen.
• Switch menu display position: Switches the menu display position (right / left).

How do you perform a capture operation?

1. Start “App Launcher” from the control menu.
2. Start [Capture] from App Launcher. Capture App will start.
3. Click the Capture button (on the right or left) An image is captured according to the function.

What are the two modes of the capture function?

• Video only (left button): Captures only a video, not including drawings on WhiteBoard. Screen shots are saved during zooming, simple drawing, screen splitting, or image display is active. With USB input, screen shots are always saved.
• WhiteBoard capture (right button): Captures an image, superimposing drawing on WhiteBoard on it.

What does the “[Set background]” button do?

Sets the captured image to the background of the WhiteBoard page when checked.

What does the “[Create new page]” button do?

Sets the captured image to the background of a new page when checked. When it is not checked, it will be set to the background of the current page.

When is the [Set background] and [Create new page] buttons enabled/disabled?

Status	Video only button	WhiteBoard Capture button
[Set background] checked	Enabled	Disabled
[Create new page] checked	Disabled	Disabled
WhiteBoard not activated	Enabled	Disabled
WhiteBoard activated (WhiteBoard mode)	Disabled	Enabled
WhiteBoard activated (Transparent mode)	Enabled	Enabled
WhiteBoard activated (Transparent mode + [Set background] checked)	Enabled	Enabled

What happens when you click a capture button?

When you click a capture button, the captured image file is saved. The file is saved in the USB memory when a USB memory is connected, and in the internal memory when it is not connected. A dialog is displayed when a file is saved.

Is the capture operation during simple drawing different?

Yes, the capture operation during simple drawing is different.

Why might the colors of the captured data differ from those of the original image?

Depending on the settings, colors of the captured data may differ from those of the original image.

How do you use the video mask function?

1. Start “App Launcher” from the control menu.
2. Start [Mask picture] from App Launcher. Two functions are available.

What are the two functions available in the video mask function?

• Spotlight mode: The entire screen is masked and a part is cut out in a square to show the image. You can move it by dragging and pinch the four corners to change the size.
• Shade mode: Sliding the mask, show the screen little by little. You can adjust the mask width of the full screen width by pinching the four corners. Also, you can move the mask position by pinching other positions.

How can I use various application functions on this unit?

This unit has various built-in applications. Selecting a function displays the screen for it.

What are the supported formats that can be installed with user data?

• JPEG
• PNG
• SVG

It is recommended to use what size stamp data?

It is recommended to use square size stamp data. (For other formats, margins are added.)

What does the Calculator application allow you to do?

The Calculator application allows you to perform simple calculations using only the four arithmetic operations.

What does the Stopwatch application provide?

The Stopwatch application provides a stopwatch function.

What does the Clock application do?

The Clock application displays a clock on the screen.

What is required to display the clock on the screen?

To display the clock, set [Date and time].

What does the Clock learning mode display?

The Clock learning mode displays a clock model used in arithmetic classes.

How can the big and small hands of the Clock learning mode be operated?

The big and small hands can be operated manually, and one hand rotates in conjunction with the other hand.

What does the Timer application display?

The Timer application displays a count-down timer.

What is the maximum time that the Timer application can be set for?

The Timer application can be set up to 2 hours, and it counts down in 1 second steps.

What happens when the Timer application reaches 0 seconds?

At 0 seconds, the alarm dialog is displayed.

What does connecting a mouse to this unit enable?

Connecting a mouse to this unit enables operations of the WhiteBoard menu.

What else can the mouse wheel be used for?

Also, the zoom function can be operated using the mouse wheel.

Does the WhiteBoard menu support vertical installation of the main unit and image rotation?

No, the WhiteBoard menu does not support vertical installation of the main unit and image rotation.

When is the setting menu displayed?

When the mouse is connected, the setting menu is displayed by right-clicking.

What does the [Annotation] setting do?

The [Annotation] setting makes the marker settings.

What are the Drawing color settings available in the [Annotation] setting?

• [Red]
• [Blue]
• [Yellow]
• [Black]

What are the Line thickness settings available in the [Annotation] setting?

• [usually line]
• [thick line]
• [thin line]

What does the Setting of the time until erasure do?

The Setting of the time until erasure allows you to set the amount of time that a marker will remain on the screen before it is erased.

What do the App launcher and settings do?

The App launcher and settings allow you to launch other applications and adjust the settings for the unit.

What does selecting the power button do?

Turns off the power.

What does the object selection method do?

The object selection method allows you to select objects on the screen.

What happens when the mouse wheel is rotated forward?

Forward rotation of the wheel zooms in.

What happens when the mouse wheel is rotated backward?

Backward rotation of the wheel zooms out.

How do you draw a marker using the Annotation feature?

A marker is drawn by moving the mouse while left-clicking.

When is the drawn marker erased?

The drawn marker is erased after the time set on the menu has elapsed.

How do you erase all drawing after the set time?

1. A marker is drawn by moving the mouse while left-clicking in [Annotation] operation state.
2. After drawing is complete, all drawing is erased after the set time has elapsed

Can you draw while the app is starting up?

No, drawing is not possible while the app is starting up.

How does the pen icon work?

The pen icon works as a color selection button for [Annotation] until timeout after drawing.

Is Annotation enabled with multiple mice?

Yes, Annotation is enabled with multiple mice.

When is a USB hub required?

When mice more than the number of the USB terminals are connected, a USB hub is required.

What is the maximum number of mice that can be connected?

Up to 8 mice can be connected.

How many mice can perform simultaneous annotation?

However, simultaneous annotation is possible with one mouse only.

Do other mice operate when one mouse is performing annotation?

No, when one mouse is performing annotation, other mice do not operate.

What does the HDMI-CEC function enable?

The HDMI-CEC function enables the remote control of this unit alone to operate the basics of HDMI-CEC compatible devices by the interlocking control between this unit and such devices.

What else does this function enable?

Also, this function enables the remote control (or main unit’s buttons) of a HDMI-CEC compatible device alone to turn on/off this unit and switch input.

How do you connect the HDMI-CEC compatible device?

Connect the HDMI-CEC compatible device to the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2, HDMI IN 3 or SLOT terminal.

How do you set up the HDMI-CEC compatible device?

Make the setting on the connected device (HDMI-CEC compatible device) so this function can operate.

What do you need to set the [HDMI-CEC settings] – [HDMI-CEC control] to?

Set [HDMI-CEC settings] – [HDMI-CEC control] to [Enable].

After turning on all the devices, what do you do next?

Turn on all the devices, and turn this unit off and on. Then check if images can be seen correctly with HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3 or SLOT input.

What does setting each item of [Link function] for [HDMI-CEC settings] do?

Performs the following interlocking operations by setting each item of [Link function] for [HDMI-CEC settings].

What happens when [Display → Device] interlocking is set to [Power off] or [Power off / on]?

Turning this unit off turns off all the connected HDMI-CEC compatible devices.

What happens when [Display → Device] interlocking is set to [Power off / on]?

• Turning this unit on turns on the HDMI-CEC compatible device connected to [HDMI1], [HDMI2], [HDMI3] or [SLOT] when the input is [HDMI1], [HDMI2], [HDMI3] or [SLOT].
• Switching the input of this unit to [HDMI1], [HDMI2], [HDMI3] or [SLOT] turns on the connected HDMI-CEC compatible device.

What happens when multiple devices are connected with the [HDMI1], [HDMI2], [HDMI3] or [SLOT] input and this unit is turned on with the [Power off / on] setting?

The device that was viewed or listened last is turned on.

What happens when this unit is turned on with the [Power off / on] setting and the device that was viewed or listened last with the [HDMI1], [HDMI2], [HDMI3] or [SLOT] input is not connected?

A device displayed for [HDMI1], [HDMI2], [HDMI3] or [SLOT] of [HDMI-CEC settings] is turned on.

What happens when [Device → Display] interlocking is set to [Power on] or [Power off / on]?

• Turning on the HDMI-CEC compatible device turns this unit on, and switches the input to [HDMI1], [HDMI2], [HDMI3] or [SLOT] to which the device is connected.
• Starting to play back on the HDMI-CEC compatible device turns this unit on, and switches the input to [HDMI1], [HDMI2], [HDMI3] or [SLOT] to which the device is connected.
• Starting to play back on the HDMI-CEC compatible device switches the input of this unit to [HDMI1], [HDMI2], [HDMI3] or [SLOT] to which the device is connected.

What happens when [Device → Display] interlocking is set to [Power off / on]?

Turning off the HDMI-CEC compatible device of input (HDMI1 / HDMI2 / HDMI3 / SLOT) with which you are currently viewing or listening turns off this unit.

How does the device interlocking function, which turns off this unit, realize the interlocking operations?

The device interlocking function, which turns off this unit, realizes the interlocking operations by monitoring signal statuses of devices. Depending on the setting, the device continues to output signals even in the power-off state. In this case, the interlocking function does not operate. In this case, refer to the manuals of the devices.

Will the input be switched when [Setup] – [Input lock] is set?

No, input will not be switched when [Setup] – [Input lock] is set.

May the interlocking control of this unit operate depending on the display status or video equipment status, such as during start-up?

Yes, depending on the display status or video equipment status, such as during start-up, the interlocking control of this unit may not operate.

How do you display the operation screen in [Setup] – [HDMI-CEC settings] – [HDMI-CEC operation]?

Display the operation screen in [Setup] – [HDMI-CEC settings] – [HDMI-CEC operation].

What does the “Name of the device” on the operation screen display?

Displays the name of the device to operate.

What happens when the button is pressed on the operation screen?

Plays from the position where programs or scenes are skipped backward by the number of pressed times.

What happens when the Play/Pause button is pressed on the operation screen?

Play/Pause (Toggle operation)

What happens when the button is pressed on the operation screen?

Plays from the position where programs or scenes are skipped forward by the number of pressed times.

What happens when the STOP button is pressed on the operation screen?

Stop

What happens when the MENU button is pressed on the operation screen?

Displays the setting menu of the device. ([MENU code] (see page 65))

What happens when the POWER button is pressed on the operation screen?

Controls the power of the device.

Is it possible to operate an HDMI-CEC compatible device with the numeric buttons <1> to <6>?

Yes, it is possible to operate HDMI-CEC compatible device with the numeric buttons <1> to <6>.

When the setting menu of the HDMI-CEC compatible device is displayed, is it possible to operate the menu with the remote control of this unit?

Yes, when the setting menu of the HDMI-CEC compatible device is displayed, it is possible to operate the menu with the remote control of this unit (<ENTER>, , <RETURN>).

Is it possible to operate the menu of the HDMI-CEC compatible device when the menu ([Setup] / [Picture] / [Sound] / [Position]) or submenu of this unit is displayed?

No, it is not possible to operate the menu of the HDMI-CEC compatible device in the following condition. • When the menu ([Setup] / [Picture] / [Sound] / [Position]) or submenu of this unit is displayed

What is the ARC (Audio Return Channel) function?

ARC (Audio Return Channel) is a function that sends digital audio signals from an HDMI terminal.

What does the ARC function enable?

It is a function that enables the audio input into the HDMI terminal, audio input terminal, etc. of this unit to be sent to an ARC-compatible device, on behalf of the built-in speaker or external output.

How do you connect an ARC-compatible device?

Connect an ARC-compatible device to the HDMI IN 3 terminal.

How do you set up the ARC-compatible device?

Make the setting on the connected device (ARC-compatible device) so this function can operate.

What do you need to set the [Setup] – [HDMI-CEC settings] – [HDMI-CEC control] to?

Set [Setup] – [HDMI-CEC settings] – [HDMI-CEC control] to [Enable].

What do you need to set the [HDMI-CEC settings] – [Link function] – [ARC] to?

Set [HDMI-CEC settings] – [Link function] – [ARC] to [Auto] or [On].

After turning on all the devices, what do you do next?

Turn on all the devices, and turn this unit off and on. Then ensure that audio input into this unit or audio of reproduced video, etc. is correctly played back on the ARC-compatible device.

What happens when [ARC] is set to [Auto]?

• When the ARC-compatible device is connected to the HDMI IN 3 terminal: Outputs audio from the ARC-compatible device.
• When the ARC-compatible device is not connected to the HDMI IN 3 terminal, or the ARC-compatible device is not turned on: Outputs audio to the output destination set for [Sound] – [Output select].

What happens when [ARC] is set to [On]?

• Always outputs audio from the ARC-compatible device.
• When the ARC-compatible device is not connected, audio is not output.

What happens when [ARC] is set to [Off]?

• Always outputs audio to the output destination set for [Sound] – [Output select].
• Even if the ARC-compatible device is connected to the HDMI IN 3 terminal, audio is not output to the ARC-compatible device.

When audio is played back on the ARC-compatible device, is the audio output from the built-in speaker or external output?

No, when audio is played back on the ARC-compatible device, audio is not output from the built-in speaker or external output.

What happens to the setting items in [Sound]?

The setting items in [Sound] are grayed out, and cannot be set.

How do you switch audio output to the built-in speaker or the external output?

To switch audio output to the built-in speaker or the external output, set [Setup] – [HDMI-CEC settings] – [ARC] to [Off].

When the ARC-compatible device is operated using the buttons or remote control of the ARC-compatible device, may such operations not be reflected in the display operation or on the display?

Yes, when the ARC-compatible device is operated using the buttons or remote control of the ARC-compatible device, such operations may not be reflected in the display operation or on the display.

What should you do when the ARC-compatible device is disconnected from or connected to the display?

When the ARC-compatible device is disconnected from or connected to the display, be sure to turn off/on the power of this unit.

When the ARC-compatible device is connected and [ARC] is set to [Auto] or [On], is the ARC-compatible device turned on regardless of the setting of [Display → Device]?

Yes, when the ARC-compatible device is connected and [ARC] is set to [Auto] or [On], the ARC-compatible device is turned on regardless of the setting of [Display → Device].

How can menu settings and adjusted values of a single display be copied to multiple displays?

Menu settings and adjusted values of a single display can be copied to multiple displays by using a USB memory or via LAN.

If the sizes of the displays are different, will the cloning function operate?

No, if the sizes of the displays are different, the cloning function does not operate.

What size displays should be used?

Use the common sized displays.

What input should be set when performing data cloning?

Set the input to something other than [USB], [MEMORY VIEWER] or [WHITEBOARD], and perform the data cloning.

What is the cloning password?

The cloning password is the one set for [Cloning password].

What is the initial password in the factory default state?

The initial password in the factory default state is [AAAA].

Is the remote control necessary to operate [LAN data cloning]?

Yes, the remote control is necessary to operate [LAN data cloning].

What data can be copied?

• Settings and set values of [Picture], [Sound], [Setup] and [Position] menus
• User image registered in [Setup] – [Image settings]
• The following contents of the [Detailed set up] page on the Web control screen [Status notification set up]
• Settings for built-in applications such as WhiteBoard

What data cannot be copied and needs to be set for each display?

• [Cloning password]

• [Security password]

• [Date and time]

• [Network settings] – [Administrator account settings]

• [Network settings] – [PJLink settings]

• [Network settings] – [Display name]

• Setting for [Network settings] – [LAN setup]

• [Synchronize display setting]

• [Time zone]

• [NTP synchronization]

• NTP server name

• DNS server

• [Control settings] – [Display ID]

• The setting contents of the [Change password] page on the Web control screen

• The following contents of the [Detailed set up] page on the Web control screen:

  • [Network config]
  • [Adjust clock]
  • [Command port set up]
  • [Certificate]
  • [Crestron Connected]
  • [HTTPS set up]

• The setting contents of the [Crestron Connected] page on the Web control screen

Are commercially available USB memory devices supported?

Yes, commercially available USB memory devices are supported. (Those with security functions are not supported.)

What format must the USB memory devices be formatted in?

USB memory devices other than those formatted in FAT16 or FAT32 cannot be used.

What is the maximum size of USB memory supported?

Up to 32 GB of USB memory in size are supported.

What partition configuration is supported?

Only single partition configuration is supported.

How do you copy (clone) data to a USB memory?

1. Insert the USB memory device to the USB terminal on the side of the display.
2. After the [Cloning password] screen is displayed, go to step 6. When the [Cloning password] screen is not displayed, follow steps 3 to 5 to display.
3. Display [Setup] menu pressing <SETUP>.
4. Select [Options] with and press <ENTER>.
5. Select [USB data cloning] with and press <ENTER>. [Cloning password] screen is displayed.
6. Enter the cloning password, and then press <ENTER>. Data cloning screen is displayed.
7. Select [Display → USB memory] with and press <ENTER>.
8. Select [Yes] with and press <ENTER>. Data copy to the USB memory starts.
9. After data copy has finished, remove the USB memory device from the USB terminal.

What may happen depending on the type of USB memory device?

Depending on the type of a USB memory device, it may come in contact with the periphery such as a back cover, and cannot be attached.

What kind of USB memory device should you use?

Use a USB memory device connectable to this unit.

What happens if you fail to save in or read from the USB memory device?

Failure to save in or read from the USB memory device displays an error message.

What message is displayed after data copy has finished?

The following message is displayed after data copy has finished. Data copy finished.

How do you copy (clone) the USB memory data to the display?

1. Insert the USB memory device, which the data has been copied, to the USB terminal of the display for data copy (same as step 1 on page 158).
2. After the [Cloning password] screen is displayed, go to step 6. When the [Cloning password] screen is not displayed, follow the steps 3 to 5 to display it.
3. Display [Setup] menu pressing <SETUP>.
4. Select [Options] with and press <ENTER>.
5. Select [USB data cloning] with and press <ENTER>. [Cloning password] screen is displayed.
6. Enter the cloning password, and then press <ENTER>. Data cloning screen is displayed.
7. Select [USB memory → Display] with and press <ENTER>.
8. Select [Yes] with and press <ENTER>. Data cloning to the display starts.
9. After data cloning has finished, remove the USB memory device from the USB terminal.
10. Press the power button on the remote control to turn the power off, and then turn the power on. Or remove the power plug from the outlet once, wait for 30 seconds or more, and then insert the power plug. The cloned content is applied to the display.

If the USB memory containing the data for cloning is connected in power-on state, what will be displayed?

If the USB memory containing the data for cloning is connected in power-on state, the [Cloning password] screen is displayed.

What message is displayed after data cloning has finished?

The following message is displayed after data cloning has finished. Cloning finished. Please turn off the power.

What happens when the USB memory is not removed in step 9?

When USB memory is not removed in step 9, the [Cloning password] screen is displayed.

How do you perform LAN data cloning?

1. Display [Setup] menu pressing <SETUP>.
2. Select [Options] with and press <ENTER>.
3. Select [LAN data cloning] with and press <ENTER>. [Cloning password] screen is displayed.
4. Enter the cloning password, and then press <ENTER>. [LAN data cloning] screen is displayed.
5. Select [Select display] with and press <ENTER>. Displays on the same subnet are listed.
6. Select the display to copy the data to with and press <VOL +>. Select all the displays to copy the data to.
7. Select [Check] with and press <ENTER>. Check the selected displays.
8. Select [Execute] with and press <ENTER>.
9. A confirmation window appears. Select [Execute] with and press <ENTER>. Data copy to the display starts.
10. The exit screen appears. The blue mark on the list shows the data has been copied successfully. The red mark shows failure. If the red mark appears, check the LAN cable connection or power status of the display of the copy destination.
11. If the data copy has finished, the message appears on the display of the copy destination.
12. Press the power button on the remote control to turn the power off, and then turn the power on. Or remove the power plug from the outlet once, wait for 30 seconds or more, and then insert the power plug. The copied content is applied to the display.

Can data be copied to the display for which [Write protect] is set to [On]?

No, data cannot be copied to the display for which [Write protect] is set to [On].

What should you set [Write protect] to in order to prevent [LAN data cloning] from being performed mistakenly when data copy is not necessary?

Set this to [On] to prevent [LAN data cloning] from being performed mistakenly when data copy is not necessary.

What happens to [Write protect] once [LAN data cloning] is performed?

Once [LAN data cloning] is performed, [Write protect] is set to [On].

What does the blue mark on the list of displays show?

The blue mark on the list shows the data has been copied successfully.

What does the red mark on the list of displays show?

The red mark shows failure.

What should you check if the red mark appears?

If the red mark appears, check the LAN cable connection or power status of the display of the copy destination.

What message appears on the display of the copy destination if the data copy has finished?

If the data copy has finished, the message appears on the display of the copy destination. Cloning finished. Please turn off the power.

How do you change the cloning password?

1. Display the [Setup] menu by pressing <SETUP>.
2. Select [Options] with and press <ENTER>.
3. Select [Cloning password] with and press <ENTER>.
4. Enter the current password, and press [Ok].
5. Enter the new password, and press [Ok].
6. Enter the new password again for confirmation, and press [Ok].

Notes:

• The initial password in the factory default state is [AAAA].
• Change the password periodically and set one that is difficult to guess.
• Consult the dealer where you purchased the product for information on initializing the cloning password.

How can you configure network settings for multiple displays using a USB memory device?

You can configure network settings for multiple displays using a USB memory device.

What items can be set using this method?

The following items in [Network settings] – [LAN setup] can be set.

• IP address
• Subnet mask
• Gateway
• [Command port]
• [EAP]

Notes:

• Ensure the following settings:
  • [Network settings] – [LAN setup] – DHCP is set to [Off].
  • [Network settings] – [Network control] is set to [On].
  • [Network settings] – [USB memory network settings] is set to [Permit]. If it is set to [Prohibit], network setting cannot be made with this function.
• Once the network setting is completed with a USB memory device, [Network settings] – [USB memory network settings] is automatically set to [Prohibit].

What devices are supported for USB memory network settings?

• Commercially available USB memory devices are supported. (Those with security functions are not supported. Operation is not guaranteed.)
• Only USB memory devices formatted in FAT16 or FAT32 can be used.
• USB memory devices up to 32 GB in size are supported.
• Only single partition configuration is supported.
• Use a writable USB memory device.

What files do you need to create on the USB memory device and what do they mean?

Create the following files and save them to the USB memory device:

File name: th-55eq2_network.sh

Setting Example:

TH-55EQ2_LAN_SETTINGS A:192.168.0.18 S:255.255.255.0 G:192.168.0.1 P:1024 I:ON E:EAP-TLS E_U:EAPUSER E_P:eappassword E_D:digitalcertificate.pfx E_C:cacerficate.cer

Settings:

• TH-55EQ2_LAN_SETTINGS: Fixed characters represent the model name. Be sure to input as follows. TH-(inch size)(Model name)_LAN_SETTINGS.
• A: Specifies the IP address.
• S: Specifies the subnet mask.
• G: Specifies the gateway address.
• P: Specifies the port number to use for the command control.
• I: Setting this to [ON] can set individual IP addresses for each main unit. One IP address is assigned to each main unit in the range that can be specified as an IP address.
• E: Selects the EAP setting. Describe the setting referring to the following.
  • NONE
  • PEAP(MS-CHAPv2)
  • PEAP(GTC)
  • EAP-TTLS(MD5)
  • EAP-TTLS(MS-CHAPv2)
  • EAP-FAST(MS-CHAPv2)
  • EAP-FAST(GTC)
  • EAP-TLS
• E_U: Specifies the EAP user name. This is referred to only when EAP is set to something other than [NONE].
• E_P: Specifies the EAP password. This is referred to only when EAP is set to something other than [NONE].
• E_D: Describe the file name of the electronic certificate (extension: PFX) used for authentication. This is referred to only when EAP is set to [EAP-TLS].
• E_C: Describe the file name of the CA certificate (extension: CER) used for authentication. This is referred to only when EAP is set to [EAP-TLS].

Notes:

• Deleting the rows “S”, “G”, “P” or “E” will not overwrite the deleted setting items. The original setting contents are retained.
• When the row “I” is deleted, it will be set to [ON] automatically.
• Be sure to fill in the rows of the fixed character and IP address.
• If the network setting fails with this function, an error message is displayed. If it fails, the network setting is not changed. Be sure to confirm the file description and insert the USB memory device again.
• This function operates only when a file with the above file name exists in the USB memory device.
• Use one-byte alphanumeric characters to describe file contents.

How do you copy the USB memory data to the display?

1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB terminal on the side of the display.
2. The [LAN setup] screen is displayed after data copy has finished.
3. Remove the USB memory device from the USB terminal.

What is the ID Remote Control Function and how can it be used?

The ID Remote Control Function allows you to set the remote control ID when you want to use the remote control on one of several different displays. To use this function, you need to set the remote control’s ID number to match the Display’s ID number you have set in [Control settings] – [Display ID] following the steps below.

Note:

• To operate this function, please purchase an ID remote controller (sold separately). Object model: N2QAYA000093

How do you set the remote control’s ID number?

1. Set [Control settings] – [Controller ID function] to [On].
2. Set the remote control’s <ID MODE> switch to <ON>.
3. Pointing the remote control at the Display you want to control, press <ID SET>.
4. Press one of <0> ‒ <9>. Sets the tens digit.
5. Press one of <0> ‒ <9>.

Notes:

• The steps from 3 to 5 need to be done within 5 seconds.
• The adjustable ID number range is 0 ‒ 100.

Examples:

• To set the ID to “1”: After step 3, press <0> and then <1>.
• To set the ID to “12”: After step 3, press <1> and then <2>.
• To set the ID to “100”: After step 3, press <1> <0> <0>.

How do you cancel the setting of the remote control’s ID number (ID “0”)?

You can operate the remote even if the ID does not match the ID set in [Control settings] – [Display ID]. Press <ID SET> for more then 3 seconds. This has the same effect as pressing <ID SET> <0> <0>.

How do you enter characters for settings that require it?

Some settings require character input. To enter text, select characters in the on-screen keyboard.

Example: Entering profile names ([Memory save])

The default profile name is [MEMORY1]; here, we are changing it to [MY PICTURE] as an example.

1. Select [All delete] with , and press <ENTER>. All text is deleted. To delete individual characters, select [Delete].
2. Select [a / A / @] with , and press <ENTER>. This switches the keyboard to the upper case alphabet. Each time <ENTER> is pressed, the keyboard is switched in the order of lower case, upper case, and symbols.
3. Select [M] with , and press <ENTER>. Repeat this process to enter the next character. Press <ENTER>.
4. As shown in step 3, select the characters to enter [PICTURE].
5. When you finish entering the profile name, select [Ok] with and press <ENTER>.

Notes:

• To cancel saving the profile, select [Cancel].

What are the corresponding signals, resolution, scanning frequencies and formats this unit supports?

Corresponding signal	Resolution (Dot)	Scanning frequency (kHz)	Dot clock frequency (MHz)	Format*2	Plug and Play-supported signal*5
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	480/60i 720 x 480i	Horizontal: 15.73 Vertical: 59.94	13.50	Y	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	576/50i 720 x 576i	Horizontal: 15.63 Vertical: 50.00	13.50	Y	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	480/60i 720 (1 440) x 480i*1	Horizontal: 15.73 Vertical: 59.94	27.00	H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	576/50i 720 (1 440) x 576i*1	Horizontal: 15.63 Vertical: 50.00	27.00	H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	480/60p 720 x 483	Horizontal: 31.47 Vertical: 59.94	27.00	Y/H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	576/50p 720 x 576	Horizontal: 31.25 Vertical: 50.00	27.00	Y/H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	720/60p 1 280 x 720	Horizontal: 45.00 Vertical: 60.00	74.25	Y/H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	720/50p 1 280 x 720	Horizontal: 37.50 Vertical: 50.00	74.25	Y/H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1080/60i 1 920 x 1 080i	Horizontal: 33.75 Vertical: 60.00	74.25	Y/H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1080/50i 1 920 x 1 080i	Horizontal: 28.13 Vertical: 50.00	74.25	Y/H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1080/24p 1 920 x 1 080	Horizontal: 27.00 Vertical: 24.00	74.25	Y/H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1080/24PsF 1 920 x 1 080i	Horizontal: 27.00 Vertical: 48.00	74.25	Y/H/UC/DL	–
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1080/25p 1 920 x 1 080	Horizontal: 28.13 Vertical: 25.00	74.25	Y/H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1080/30p 1 920 x 1 080	Horizontal: 33.75 Vertical: 30.00	74.25	Y/H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1080/60p 1 920 x 1 080	Horizontal: 67.50 Vertical: 60.00	148.50	Y/H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1080/50p 1 920 x 1 080	Horizontal: 56.25 Vertical: 50.00	148.50	Y/H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	2K/24p 2 048 x 1 080	Horizontal: 27.00 Vertical: 24.00	74.25	H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	2K/25p 2 048 x 1 080	Horizontal: 28.13 Vertical: 25.00	74.25	H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	2K/30p 2 048 x 1 080	Horizontal: 33.75 Vertical: 30.00	74.25	H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	2K/48p 2 048 x 1 080	Horizontal: 54.00 Vertical: 48.00	148.50	H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	2K/60p 2 048 x 1 080	Horizontal: 67.50 Vertical: 60.00	148.50	H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	2K/50p 2 048 x 1 080	Horizontal: 56.25 Vertical: 50.00	148.50	H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	3840 x 2160/24p 3 840 x 2 160	Horizontal: 54.00 Vertical: 24.00	297.00	H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	3840 x 2160/25p 3 840 x 2 160	Horizontal: 56.25 Vertical: 25.00	297.00	H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	3840 x 2160/30p 3 840 x 2 160	Horizontal: 67.50 Vertical: 30.00	297.00	H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	3840 x 2160/60p 3 840 x 2 160	Horizontal: 135.00 Vertical: 60.00	594.00	H/UC/DL*4	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	3840 x 2160/50p 3 840 x 2 160	Horizontal: 112.50 Vertical: 50.00	594.00	H/UC/DL*4	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	4096 x 2160/24p 4 096 x 2 160	Horizontal: 54.00 Vertical: 24.00	297.00	H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	4096 x 2160/25p 4 096 x 2 160	Horizontal: 56.25 Vertical: 25.00	297.00	H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	4096 x 2160/30p 4 096 x 2 160	Horizontal: 67.50 Vertical: 30.00	297.00	H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	4096 x 2160/60p 4 096 x 2 160	Horizontal: 135.00 Vertical: 60.00	594.00	H/UC/DL*4	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	4096 x 2160/50p 4 096 x 2 160	Horizontal: 112.50 Vertical: 50.00	594.00	H/UC/DL*4	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	640 x 400/70 640 x 400	Horizontal: 31.47 Vertical: 70.09	25.18	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	640 x 400/85 640 x 400	Horizontal: 37.86 Vertical: 85.08	31.50	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	640 x 480/60 640 x 480	Horizontal: 31.47 Vertical: 59.94	25.18	R/H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	640 x 480/67 640 x 480	Horizontal: 35.00 Vertical: 66.67	30.24	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	640 x 480/73 640 x 480	Horizontal: 37.86 Vertical: 72.81	31.50	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	640 x 480/75 640 x 480	Horizontal: 37.50 Vertical: 75.00	31.50	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	640 x 480/85 640 x 480	Horizontal: 43.27 Vertical: 85.01	36.00	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	800 x 600/56 800 x 600	Horizontal: 35.16 Vertical: 56.25	36.00	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	800 x 600/60 800 x 600	Horizontal: 37.88 Vertical: 60.32	40.00	R/H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	800 x 600/72 800 x 600	Horizontal: 48.08 Vertical: 72.19	50.00	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	800 x 600/75 800 x 600	Horizontal: 46.88 Vertical: 75.00	49.50	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	800 x 600/85 800 x 600	Horizontal: 53.67 Vertical: 85.06	56.25	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	832 x 624/75 832 x 624	Horizontal: 49.72 Vertical: 74.55	57.28	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	852 x 480/60 852 x 480	Horizontal: 31.47 Vertical: 59.94	34.24	H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1024 x 768/50 1 024 x 768	Horizontal: 39.55 Vertical: 50.00	51.89	H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1024 x 768/60 1 024 x 768	Horizontal: 48.36 Vertical: 60.00	65.00	R/H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1024 x 768/70 1 024 x 768	Horizontal: 56.48 Vertical: 70.07	75.00	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1024 x 768/75 1 024 x 768	Horizontal: 60.02 Vertical: 75.03	78.75	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1024 x 768/82 1 024 x 768	Horizontal: 65.55 Vertical: 81.63	86.00	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1024 x 768/85 1 024 x 768	Horizontal: 68.68 Vertical: 85.00	94.50	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1066 x 600/60 1 066 x 600	Horizontal: 37.64 Vertical: 59.94	53.00	H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1152 x 864/60 1 152 x 864	Horizontal: 53.70 Vertical: 60.00	81.62	H/UC/DL	○
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1152 x 864/70 1 152 x 864	Horizontal: 63.99 Vertical: 70.02	94.20	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1152 x 864/75 1 152 x 864	Horizontal: 67.50 Vertical: 75.00	108.00	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1152 x 864/85 1 152 x 864	Horizontal: 77.09 Vertical: 85.00	119.65	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1152 x 870/75 1 152 x 870	Horizontal: 68.68 Vertical: 75.06	100.00	R/H/UC/DL
HDMI USB-C DL DP4K/ 60p*6 4K/ 30P 2K 4K/ 60p 4K/ 30P 2K	1280 x 720/60 1 280 x 720	Horizontal: 44.76 Vertical: 60.00

If a signal with a non-applicable color system format, or frequency is input, what will be displayed?

Only the input terminal indication is displayed.

What should you do if a display error such as “no picture” occurs, or remote control operation is suddenly disabled?

Remove the power plug from the socket outlet and insert it again after 5 seconds or more to turn the power on.

What should you do if the power automatically turns off unexpectedly?

Check the settings of [No signal power off], “Power management” function for each input and [No activity power off]. Any of them may be set to [On (Enable)].

What does it mean if the power indicator is blinking in orange?

There is a possibility of malfunction. Contact an Authorized Service Centre.

What should you do if no remote control operations can be performed?

Check the following:

• Whether the batteries have discharged completely and, if they have not, whether they were inserted properly.
• Whether the remote control sensor is exposed to an outdoor light or a strong fluorescent light.
• Whether any obstacle is present between the remote control sensor and the remote control.
• Whether the remote control designed specifically for use with the unit is being used. (The unit cannot be operated by any other remote control.)
• Whether the option other than [Off] is selected in [Controller user level].
• Whether [Controller ID function] is set to [On].
• Whether <ID MODE> switch is set to <ON>. (When using ID remote controller)

What should you do if the [Controller ID function] function cannot be used? (When using ID remote controller)

Check whether [Controller ID function] is set to [On], or <ID MODE> switch is set to <ON>. (When [Controller ID function] is set to [On], you need to set <ID MODE> switch to <ON> and set the ID number.)

What should you do if the top or bottom of the picture on the screen is cut off?

The image position has been adjusted in the [Position] menu. Adjust the position of the picture on the screen.

Why are there areas at the top and bottom of the screen where the picture is not displayed?

When using a video software program (such as a cinema size program) with a screen wider than one in the 16:9 mode, blank areas separate from the images are formed at the top and bottom of the screen.

Why do parts of the unit become hot?

Even when the temperature of parts of the front, top and rear panels has risen, these temperature rises will not pose any problems in terms of performance or quality.

Why is there no picture displayed or sound output sometimes?

When an HDMI signal is input to the Display using a selector or distributor, sound or images may not be output in the normal fashion depending on the selector or distributor used. The symptoms may be improved by turning the power off and on again, or by replacing the selector or distributor.

What should you do if a small sound becomes loud or the volume of a large sound is restricted?

Check that [Auto volume] is not active (Min / Mid / Max).

What should you do if noise is disturbing or the volume balance between vocals and musical instruments is poor when listening to music?

Check that [Auto volume] is not active (Min / Mid / Max).

What should you do if sound distortion or noise annoys you?

Check whether the rated (0.5 Vrms) audio or more is input to audio input terminals (AUDIO IN). Use the unit within the rated audio input.

What should you do if the RS-232C is uncontrollable?

Check whether the connection has been made properly.

What should you do if the LAN is uncontrollable?

Check the following:

• That the connection has been made properly.
• To control with WEB browser control or command control, check that [Network settings] – [Network control] is set to [On].
• That [LAN setup] is set properly.
• When connecting to a device of AMX, Extron or Crestron Electronics, Inc., set [AMX D. D.], [Extron XTP] or [Crestron Connected™] according to the device to use.
• The [DIGITAL LINK status] – [Signal quality] information to check the LAN cable status such as whether the LAN cable is disconnected or the cable is not shielded.

Why is there no picture displayed or sound output from the [DIGITAL LINK IN] terminal of DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board?

Check the following:

• Whether the connection has been made properly between the video (output) equipment and twisted pair cable transmitter and between the twisted pair cable transmitter and this product.
• That [Network settings] – [DIGITAL LINK mode] is not set to [Ethernet].

Why can the file be played back with “USB media player”, but not with “Memory viewer”?

Check the playback file specifications of “USB media player” and “Memory viewer”.

Why do WhiteBoard operations not work?

Check whether [Whiteboard settings] – [Whiteboard] in the [Setup] menu is not set to [Off]. The microcomputer in the touch panel may malfunction due to strong external noise, so keep the noise source as far as possible.

Why does the screen darken slightly when bright pictures with minimal movements are shown?

The screen will darken slightly when photos, still images of a computer or other pictures with minimal movements are shown for an extended period. This is done to reduce image retention on the screen and the shortening of the screen’s service life: It is normal and not indicative of malfunctioning.

Why does it take a while for the picture to appear?

The unit digitally processes the various signals to reproduce esthetically pleasing images. As such, it sometimes takes a few moments for the picture to appear when the power has been turned on, when the input has been switched.

Why do the edges of the images flicker?

Due to the characteristics of the system used to drive the liquid crystal panel, the edges may appear to flicker in the fast-moving parts of the images: This is normal and not indicative of malfunctioning.

Why are there red spots, blue spots, green spots and black spots on the screen?

This is a characteristic of liquid crystal panels and is not a problem. The liquid crystal panel is built with very high precision technology giving you fine picture details. Occasionally, a few non-active pixels may appear on the screen as fixed points of red, blue, green, or black. Please note this does not affect the performance of your LCD. Image retention may occur. If you display a still picture for an extended period, the image might remain on the screen. However, it will disappear when a general moving picture is displayed for a while. This is not considered as malfunction.

Why does image retention appear?

This LCD Display uses special image processing. Hence, a slight time lag may occur between image and audio, depending on the type of input signal. However, this is not a malfunction.

What is the power consumption of the 86-inch model?

580 W

What is the power consumption of the 75-inch model?

385 W

What is the power consumption of the 65-inch model?

340 W

What is the power consumption of the 55-inch model?

280 W

What is the power consumption of the 50-inch model?

255 W

What is the power consumption of the 43-inch model?

225 W

What is the power consumption in stand-by condition?

0.5 W (Quick start: Off)

What type of LCD Display panel does the 86-inch model have?

86-inch ADS panel (Direct LED backlight), 16:9 aspect ratio

What type of LCD Display panel does the 75-inch model have?

75-inch ADS panel (Direct LED backlight), 16:9 aspect ratio

What type of LCD Display panel does the 65-inch model have?

65-inch ADS panel (Direct LED backlight), 16:9 aspect ratio

What type of LCD Display panel does the 55-inch model have?

55-inch ADS panel (Direct LED backlight), 16:9 aspect ratio

What type of LCD Display panel does the 50-inch model have?

50-inch VA panel (Direct LED backlight), 16:9 aspect ratio

What type of LCD Display panel does the 43-inch model have?

43-inch ADS panel (Direct LED backlight), 16:9 aspect ratio

What are the display panel dimensions (W x H x D) of the 86-inch model?

1 895.0 mm (W) × 1 065.9 mm (H) × 2 174.2 mm (diagonal) / 74.60” (W) × 41.96” (H) × 85.60” (diagonal)

What are the display panel dimensions (W x H x D) of the 75-inch model?

1 649.6 mm (W) × 927.9 mm (H) × 1 892.7 mm (diagonal) / 64.94” (W) × 36.53” (H) × 74.51” (diagonal)

What are the display panel dimensions (W x H x D) of the 65-inch model?

1 428.4 mm (W) × 803.5 mm (H) × 1 638.9 mm (diagonal) / 56.23” (W) × 31.63” (H) × 64.52” (diagonal)

What are the display panel dimensions (W x H x D) of the 55-inch model?

1 209.6 mm (W) × 680.4 mm (H) × 1 387.8 mm (diagonal) / 47.62” (W) × 26.78” (H) × 54.63” (diagonal)

What are the display panel dimensions (W x H x D) of the 50-inch model?

1 095.8 mm (W) × 616.4 mm (H) × 1 257.3 mm (diagonal) / 43.14” (W) × 24.26” (H) × 49.50” (diagonal)

What are the display panel dimensions (W x H x D) of the 43-inch model?

941.1 mm (W) × 529.4 mm (H) × 1 079.8 mm (diagonal) / 37.05” (W) × 20.84” (H) × 42.51” (diagonal)

How many pixels does the display have?

8 294 400 (3 840 (Horizontal) × 2 160 (Vertical))

What are the dimensions (W × H × D) of the 86-inch model?

1 929 mm × 1 100 mm × 96 mm (excluding handles: 70 mm) / 75.95” × 43.31” × 3.76” (excluding handles: 2.74”)

What are the dimensions (W × H × D) of the 75-inch model?

1 684 mm × 962 mm × 96 mm (excluding handles: 70 mm) / 66.28” × 37.87” × 3.76” (excluding handles: 2.74”)

What are the dimensions (W × H × D) of the 65-inch model?

1 463 mm × 838 mm × 94 mm (excluding handles: 69 mm) / 57.58” × 32.97” × 3.68” (excluding handles: 2.72”)

What are the dimensions (W × H × D) of the 55-inch model?

1 242 mm × 713 mm × 66 mm / 48.89” × 28.06” × 2.60”

What are the dimensions (W × H × D) of the 50-inch model?

1 129 mm × 649 mm × 66 mm / 44.43” × 25.56” × 2.60”

What are the dimensions (W × H × D) of the 43-inch model?

973 mm × 562 mm × 65 mm / 38.31” × 22.10” × 2.56”

What is the net weight of the 86-inch model?

Approx. 50.7 kg / 111.8 lbs

What is the net weight of the 75-inch model?

Approx. 37.3 kg / 82.2 lbs

What is the net weight of the 65-inch model?

Approx. 29.7 kg / 65.5 lbs

What is the net weight of the 55-inch model?

Approx. 18.0 kg / 39.7 lbs

What is the net weight of the 50-inch model?

Approx. 15.5 kg / 34.2 lbs

What is the net weight of the 43-inch model?

Approx. 11.7 kg / 25.8 lbs

What is the power source?

110 – 240 V ~ (110 – 240 V alternating current), 50/60 Hz

What is the operating temperature?

0 °C – 40 °C (32 °F – 104 °F) *1

What is the operating humidity?

20 % – 80 % (no condensation)

What is the operating time?

18 hours/day

What is the supply power for SLOT?

3.3 V/max 1.1 A, 12 V/max 5.5 A

What are the connection terminal types and specifications for HDMI IN 1 HDMI IN 2 HDMI IN 3?

TYPE A Connector*2 × 3 (Supports 4K) Compatible with HDCP 2.2 Audio signal: Linear PCM (sampling frequencies: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)

What are the connection terminal types and specifications for PC IN?

Mini D-sub 15 Pin (Compatible with DDC2B) × 1

• Y/G: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω) (with sync signal) 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω) (without sync signal)
• PB/CB/B: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω) (without sync signal)
• PR/CR/R: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω) (without sync signal)
• HD/VD: TTL (high impedance)

What are the connection terminal types and specifications for AUDIO IN?

Stereo mini jack (M3) (φ3.5 mm) × 1, 0.5 Vrms

What are the connection terminal types and specifications for AUDIO OUT?

Stereo mini jack (M3) (φ3.5 mm) × 1, 0.5 Vrms Output: Variable (-∞ – 0 dB) (1 kHz 0 dB input, 10 kΩ load)

What are the connection terminal types and specifications for SERIAL IN?

External Control Terminal D-sub 9 Pin × 1: RS-232C compatible

What are the connection terminal types and specifications for LAN?

RJ45 × 1: For network connection, compatible with PJLink Communication method: RJ45, 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX

What are the connection terminal types and specifications for IR IN?

Stereo mini jack (M3) (φ 3.5 mm) × 1

What are the connection terminal types and specifications for IR OUT?

Stereo mini jack (M3) (φ 3.5 mm) × 1

What are the connection terminal types and specifications for USB?

USB connector × 1, TYPE A DC 5 V / max 1 A, Compatible with USB 3.0

What are the connection terminal types and specifications for USB-C HOST?

USB connector × 1, TYPE C Max. 60 W (compatible with Power Delivery), Compatible with USB 2.0, Compatible with DP Alt Mode

What are the connection terminal types and specifications for USB DEVICE?

USB connector × 1, TYPE A DC 5 V / max 2 A, Compatible with USB 2.0

What are the speaker specifications for the 86-inch and 75-inch models?

15 mm × 25 mm × 1 / φ 70 mm × 1 × 2 pieces

What are the speaker specifications for the 65-inch, 55-inch, 50-inch, and 43-inch models?

φ 30 mm × 2 × 2 pieces

What is the Audio Output?

20 W [10 W + 10 W] (10 % THD)

What is the power source for the remote control?

DC 3 V (battery (AAA/R03/LR03 type) × 2)

What is the operating range of the remote control?

Approx. 7 m (22.9 ft) (when operated directly in front of remote control sensor)

What is the mass of the remote control?

Approx. 63 g / 2.22 oz (including batteries)

What are the remote control dimensions (W × H × D)?

48 mm × 134 mm × 20 mm / 1.89” × 5.28” × 0.76”

What is the environmental temperature to use this unit at high altitudes (1 400 m (4 593 ft) and higher and below 2 800 m (9 186 ft) above sea level)?

0 °C to 35 °C (32 °F to 95 °F)

Is VIERA LINK supported?

No.

For how long will Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. provide a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code covered under GPL V2.0, LGPL V2.0, LGPL V2.1 or the other licenses with the obligation to do so, as well as the respective copyright notice thereof?

At least three (3) years from delivery of this product.

What is the contact information for a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code?

oss-cd-request@gg.jp.panasonic.com

Where can I find additional information about the AVC Patent Portfolio License, VC-1 Patent Portfolio License and MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License?

http://www.mpegla.com

Where can I find disposal or recycling information for the USA?

• Website: https://www.panasonic.com/us/corporate/sustainability.html
• Phone: 1-888-769-0149

Where can I find the model number and serial number of this product?

On the rear panel.

Where is the Executive Office of Panasonic Connect North America Unit of Panasonic Corporation of North America located?

Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, New Jersey 07102

Where is Panasonic Canada Inc. located?

5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3

Where is the Authorized Representative in EU located?

Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH Panasonic Testing Centre Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany

Where is the Importer for UK located?

Panasonic Connect UK, a branch of Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH, Maxis 2, Western Road, Bracknell, Berkshire, RG12 1RT

Where is Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. located?

4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

What is the Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. website?

https://panasonic.net/cns/prodisplays/

What do the symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents that look like this mean?

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries must not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation. By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment. For more information about collection and recycling, please contact your local authority. Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.

What does it mean if the battery symbol is used in combination with a chemical symbol?

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case, it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.